Home

User Manual - FTP Directory Listing

Contents

1. Manage Hotspots for Locations 171 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add an Advanced Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher You set up a hotspot by adding it to a location An advanced hotspot with voucher access lets you customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file the application supports CSS page styling including customized advanced login messages and a custom end user license agreement EULA A voucher is used for authentication Note The default splash page for an advanced hotspot is responsive to tablet and smartphone displays For information about setting up a basic hotspot with voucher access see Add a Basic Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher on page 164 When you set up an advanced hotspot with paid voucher access you can also select to provide limited free access in addition to the paid access For example you could provide free access for the first hour and then require paid access for any additional hours gt To add an advanced hotspot with voucher and optional limited free WiFi access to a location or individual WiFi network 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Note You can click the Add Hotspot link on the Home page in which case the hotspot wizard functions
2. To view other details about the access point on the main page click another section heading for example IP Setting For information about how to change the access point settings see Manage Access Point Settings on page 85 Manage Access Points at a Location 83 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Assign an Access Point to a Location You can assign an unassigned access point to a building and floor of a location or change an already assigned access point to a different building and floor of a location gt To assign an access point or change the assignment of an access point i 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display take one or more of the following steps a To view only unassigned access points in the INVENTORY tree on the left click Unassigned b To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor c If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons Q
3. 17 To set usage limits select the Yes radio button Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Edit Splash Set Usage Network Policy Page Plans Set Usage Plans Set usage limits for your hotspot by choosing time and login limits You can either create a new usage usage plan copy from an existing usage plan and use existing usage plan Configure usage limits for this hotspot Yes No Usage Plan Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Policy Name Limit access to Hours per Month Permitted access hours 12 00 AM to 12 00 AM 18 Select a radio button to specify how you want to set up the usage limits for the hotspot You can create a new usage plan copy and customize an existing usage plan or use an existing usage plan Manage Hotspots for Locations 158 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 19 Configure the settings as described in the following table 20 Setting Create New Policy Name Limit access to Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Permitted access hours Copy From Existing Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Based on From the menu select the existing shared usage plan on which you want to base the hotspot usage plan Policy
4. From the menu select the shared captive portal that you want to use as the captive portal for the hotspot 11 Take one of the following actions e If you selected the Use Existing radio button go to Step 20 e If you selected the Create New or Copy From Existing radio button click the NEXT button Manage Hotspots for Locations 156 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Edit Splash Network Policy Page Edit Splash Page Customize the splash page content by choosing an image for logo a title a message to show to users and a End User License Agreement Basic Advanced Image alignment lef center right UPLOAD Header Welcome Text 12 Make sure that the Basic radio button is selected This radio button is selected by default 13 Customize the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Image In relation to the splash page that welcomes the users you can perform the following tasks e By default the right radio button is selected and the image on the splash page is aligned at the right side You can select the center or left radio button To customize the image on the splash page click the UPLOAD button navigate to an image and upload it to the application Header By default the header text is Welcome You can customize this text Text The default text and components that display on the splash page depen
5. 1 Leave the No radio button selected which is the default setting 2 Go to Step 20 Select a radio button to specify how you want to set up the usage plan or plans for the hotspot For the voucher usage limit plan and the free access usage limit plan independently you can create a new usage plan copy and customize an existing usage plan or use an existing usage plan Manage Hotspots for Locations 168 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 14 Configure the settings for voucher access free access or both as described in the following table Sap Create New Usage Plan Name Limit access to Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan for the hotspot Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Permitted access hours Allow Copy From Existing Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Enter the number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed for one voucher By default no limit is set Based on From the menu select the shared usage plan on which you want to base the usage plan for the hotspot Usage Plan Name Limit access to Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan for the hotspot Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access
6. 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 188 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Account Statistics monrrormc Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v ja Current Network Health Trend of Alarms PDT 40 gt location2 0 H sri homeaP APsdown out of 33 Saturday Sunday Trend of Top 3 APs by Traffic PDT Top Hotspot PDT 600 600 MB Thursday Saturday Monday Wednesday 200 Thursday Monday Wednesday Saturday h License Usage Top 3 Wireless Networks Top 3 Locations SSID Location of Clients Location Usage 3 3 Managed Access Points at0loctnet2 location2 location2 647 83 GB A at0loctnett location2 sri homeAP 1 26 GB Days Left in trial sri homeAP1 sri homeAP By default Summary is selected and the page displays the network health trend of alarms top statistics for several categories and license usage The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 2 7 ays You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To view details point to a graph To drill down to a pa
7. A WARNING lf access points are assigned to a floor that you remove the access points are removed from the location and returned to their default settings To remove a floor from a building 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click a location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display Click the building The Building Name field displays From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Building A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The building is removed from the location Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 53 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage WiFi and Global Settings for a Location The WiFi settings and global settings for a location apply to all networks and access points that you configure for that location The following sections describe the WiFi and global settings for a location e Manage the WiFi Radio or Radios for a Location e Manage Load Balancing for Access Points at a Location e Manage RF Assignment and Output Power for a Location e Assign User Groups to
8. Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA An advanced captive portal profile for free access or access through cloud AAA lets you customize and restyle a splash page file the application supports CSS page styling including customized advanced login messages and a custom end user license agreement EULA You can assign click through click through with email or cloud AAA authentication Note The default splash page for an advanced captive portal profile is responsive to tablet and smartphone displays For information about adding a basic captive portal profile for free access or access through cloud AAA see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 111 To add an advanced captive portal profile for free access or access through cloud AAA 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Captive Portal Profile The Captive Portal wizard starts Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 114 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Captive Portal Profile Add Captive Portal Profile Profile Name Authentication Click T
9. All fields in the user row highlight blue and the VIEW button becomes available b Click the VIEW button Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details DD Search Result Summary General Usage Identifier DD1E15D6 Total Tx Bytes 106 81 MB SSID GolfWeek Total Rx Bytes 28 97 MB Location SunnyMountainResort Total of Sessions 1 Current Connection State Disconnected Total Purchase 12 First Connected time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Remaining Time 0d 11h 33m Last Connected Time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Expiration date N A Total Connected Time 0d 0h 26m Trend PDT gt Details By default the summary for the hotspot user displays c To view the trend or the details for the hotspot user click the Trend PDT or Details heading respectively Access Point Level Monitor an Access Point The following sections describe how you monitor an access point e View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point e View the Clients That Are Connected to an Access Point e View Details and Statistics for an Access Point Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 225 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note For information about active alarms cleared alarms and the event log for an access point see Access Point Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for an Access Point on page 248 View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point You can view the sum
10. By default the period of access is not limited Permitted access hours Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Allow Enter the number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed for one voucher By default no limit is set Use Existing Use From the menu select the shared usage plan that you want to use as the usage plan for the hotspot 15 Take one of the following actions e If you selected the Use Existing radio button go to Step 20 e If you selected the Create New or Copy From Existing radio button click the NEXT button Manage Hotspots for Locations 169 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Edit Splash Network Policy Page Edit Splash Page Customize the splash page content by choosing an image for logo a title a message to show to users and a End User License Agreement Basic Advanced RESET Image Alignment left center right UPLOAD Welcome 16 Make sure that the Basic radio button is selected This radio button is selected by default 17 Customize the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Image In relation to the splash page that welcomes the users you can perform the following tasks e By default the right radio button is selected and the image on the splash page is aligned at the
11. In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons wm below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click the access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point From the Choose Action menu select Reboot This Access Point The access point reboots The application does not provide a confirmation It might take several minutes before the access point comes back up and reconnects to the application Remove an Access Point from Your Account You can remove an access point from your account irrespective of whether the access point is assigned or unassigned If you only want to reassign an access point you
12. Limit access to Hours per Month Permitted access hours 12 00 AM to 12 00 Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 128 8 9 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Specify the following settings e Limit access to Use the field and menu to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Permitted access hours Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours To configure the maximum number of concurrent connections click the Devices heading Devices Allow concurrent connections per username or voucher 10 In the Allow field enter the number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed for one user or one voucher By default no limit is set 11 Click the ADD THIS USAGE PLAN button The Usage Plan page displays the basic features for the usage plan Change a Usage Plan You can change a usage plan including the maximum period of allowed access the hours during which access is allowed and the number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed To change a usage plan ty 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays
13. Your access code is D2DD5A93 Access Plan GUESTS Voucher Price 8 00 Your access restrictions are Expires at 12 00 AM 06 30 2015 PDT Figure 3 Single voucher with expiration Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 183 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Network Name GolfWeek Access Plan GOLFWEEK Your access restrictions are Allow access for 40 hour per week Allow access from 12 00 AM to 12 00 AM Network Name Network Name GolfWeek GolfWeek Your Access code is Your Access code is F7348430 155DF976 a ae En ee NET OEI Network Name Network Name GolfWeek GolfWeek Your Access code is i Your Access code is E41E4833 72CD16AD Figure 4 Voucher without expiration for multiple customers View the Status of Vouchers for a Hotspot Reprint a Voucher or Delete Vouchers The status of a voucher indicates whether a voucher is active or expired how much of the voucher is consumed and when the voucher expires In addition you can view details about the voucher and voucher holder reprint a voucher or delete one or more vouchers gt To view the status of vouchers for a hotspot reprint a voucher or delete one or more vouchers 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click th
14. e Client MAC address A WiFi network must be set up as a click through hotspot or a voucher hotspot with limited free access that requires the user to click through Email address A WiFi network must be set up as a click through hotspot for which an email address is required or a voucher hotspot with limited free access that requires the user to click through with an email address e User name A captive portal for cloud AAA authentication must be assigned to a WiFi network A hotspot user must sign in with a user name and password e Voucher ID The WiFi network must be set up as voucher hotspot gt To search the hotspot database for user activity in a WiFi network 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 223 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Inthe MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 Click the Wireless Networks icon All WiFi networks at the location display 7 Click a WiFi network The summary page for the WiFi network displays 8 Select Hotspot Users gt User Activity Summary Client
15. e If only a few access points are assigned to the location on the main page click the access point configuration e If many access points are assigned to the location and you know the building and floor to which the access point is assigned do the following a In the MONITORING tree click the building and then the floor b In the MONITORING tree click the access point e f many access points are assigned to the application and you do not know the building and floor do the following a On the main page use the icons m below the Choose Action menu to search for the access point b On the main page click the access point configuration The summary page for the access point displays 8 Select Cleared Alarms View and Manage Alarms and Events 251 10 11 12 13 14 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary Clients Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring Download Full Cleared Alarms Title Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Discon
16. 10 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v HOTSPOT USERS Trend PDT Connected time Paid vs Free Paid mfree Details The page displays trend graphs for the connected time for both paid and free captive portal access The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right ss 7 days You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To view details point to a graph To view only paid access remove the free access trend from the graph by clicking the blue Free button once To view only free access remove the paid access trend from the graph by clicking the red Paid button once To view other aspects of the hotspot usage and adjust the graph take one of the following actions e To view the number of paid devices versus free devices from the menu on the upper right select Number of Devices Paid vs Free e To view the traffic in bytes of paid devices versus free devices from the menu on the upper right select Traffic bytes Paid vs Free By default the graph show the connected time of devices with paid access versus the connected time of devices with free access To view details about hotspot users click the Details heading Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 209 Business Central Wireles
17. 198 View the Health Summary for aLocation 0 0 e ee eee 198 View Access Point Details for a Location 0 0 2 cece eee ee 199 View the Command Log for a Location 0 0 cece eee ee eee 201 Location Level Monitor the Usage at aLocation 00 204 View the Usage Summary for a Location 0 0 e eee eee 204 View Client Details for a Location 0 0 e eee ee 206 View Hotspot Usage at a Location ic cccccadcdviasscscesedeseesie eden 208 Search the Hotspot Database for a Location 000 e ee aee 211 Location Level Monitor the Security at aLocation 00 213 View the Security Summary for a Location 00 00 ee 214 View the Neighbor Details for a Location and Mark Neighbor Access POINTS ccc rcgesssi Gani Foccdwmamed arr aeseauaeeeaswar sas aes 215 WiFi Network Level Monitor a WiFi Network sessessesasseneeeene 217 View the Summary of Statistics for a WiFi Network 217 View the Clients That Are Connected to a WiFi Network 219 View Hotspot Usage for a WiFi Network 0 e cee eee eee 220 Search the Hotspot Database for a WiFi Network 00005 223 Access Point Level Monitor an Access Point 0 00 c eee e eee eee 225 View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point 226 View the Clients That Are Connected to an Access Point 228 Vi
18. 20 You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days or you can select to display all entries in the active alarms database To see details about an alarm do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the alarm or click any field in any column for the alarm except for a field in the Source column b To close the alarm details click the triangle or field again To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous figure To sort the table click a table header To download the alarms as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Active Alarms link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table To acknowledge one several or all alarms do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the alarms or to select all alarms select the check box in the table header b From the Choose
19. 802 11n devices function at limited speed if 802 119 devices are also connected A wider channel improves the performance but some legacy devices can operate only in either 20 MHz or 40 MHz The default channel width setting for the 2 4 GHz radio is 20MHz To specify another channel width select an option from the menu Wireless Mode Channel Width Note Does not apply to the 11a wireless mode By default the highest supported wireless mode is selected for the 5 GHz radio 11na You can select one of the following wireless modes 11a 802 11n devices can connect to the access point because they are backward compatible but they function at limited speed 11na This is the default setting 802 11n devices function at limited speed if 11a devices are also connected A wider channel improves the performance but some legacy devices can operate only in either 20 MHz or 40 MHz The default channel width setting for the 5 GHz radio is Dynamic 20 40MHz To specify another channel width select an option from the menu Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 56 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Advanced Features Note To display the advanced features for either the 2 4 GHz radio or 5 GHz radio click the Show Advanced Features link Beacon Interval A beacon transmission allows wireless devices to synchronize with the access point The beacon interval determine
20. Building Name Specify a building name Click the ADD THIS BUILDING button The application confirms the addition Click the Add Floor link Add Floor Floor Name Floor Length Floor Width In Building Specify a floor name the floor length in feet and the floor width in feet From the In Building menu select the building to which you want to add the floor If no other building exist for the location leave the In Building menu as is Click the ADD THIS FLOOR button The application confirms the addition Decide whether you want to add an access point at this time Do not add an access point If you do not want to add an access point at this time do the following a Click the Close button b Repeat Step 9 through Step 75 until you add all floors that you need for the building c Follow Step 17 skip Step 18 and continue with Step 18 Note You can always add an access point at a later time see Chapter 5 Manage Access Points at a Location Add an access point To add an access point do the following a Click the Add Access Point link Add Access Point NOTE Please power cycle your Access Point in order to avoid waiting for it to establish connection with this cloud management platform The AP Local Password for this A ll be set to the AP Local Password for the Location to which it is assigned If it is not assigned to a Location the AP Local password be set to the Account s Default AP Loc
21. Critical The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the cleared alarms as Last 30 Days 6 To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a Right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts 7 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 25 You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days or you can select to display all entries in the cleared alarms database 8 To see details about an alarm do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the alarm or click any field in any column for the alarm except for a field in the Source column For more information about the fields in the Source column see Step 74 View and Manage Alarms and Events 237 10 11 12 13 14 Business Central Wireless Manager Application b To close the alarm details click the triangle or field again To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the alarms as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Cleared Alarms link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information th
22. Gq Wireless Networks Zip Code 96145 gt Access Points Street Address 12784 Mount Watson Road City Tahoe City State California Time Zone USA Pacific gt Wireless Radio gt Load Balancing gt Radio On Off gt Auto RF gt Building Access Controls Radio On Off Schedules X gt AP Local Management Captive Portal Profiles Radius Server Profiles Radius Server Usage Plan User Groups On the left the LOCATIONS tree displays highlighting the location that you just added and showing the Wireless Networks heading and Access Points heading On the main page the Location Profile section is expanded and displays the details of the location 12 To verify the configuration of the WiFi network and access point if you added any do the following a In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The buildings that you just added display The WiFi network that you just added displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of the WiFi network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section expands To view other details about the network on the main page click another section heading for example Security Get Started With Cloud Management 27 Business Central Wireless Manager Application For information about how to change the network settings see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading Building 1 di
23. Publication Part Number Publish Date Comments 202 11548 02 September 2015 Documented minor feature refinements 202 11548 01 June 2015 Initial publication Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager Business Central Wireless Manager Application Concepts 9 System Architecture Concepts 0 cece cece eee eee eee ees 9 KEY FUN CHONG is c 0 6 s cs dr drnergdngedeaedeataaea aa r a 11 Provisioning FUNCTIONS sos cessvueaevernradnias ee dadereremew ewer ey saws 11 Configuring and Managing Functions 0 cece eee ee eee eee 11 Monitoring FUNCTIONS o oo oo oa rae talerimidieiiem eine mae aern eae ae es 13 Account Management FUNCTIONS 65 ssn ticne bo orb owe been Sang oaaes 13 Wizards for Ease Of Configuration ua scdaneceeddeneeinsaavcdaseeenedat 13 Application ROIES sici 54 4 444 00 e2e eee eFTGAEAAIOPY PH PE PEGG REEE DECREE 14 Plan a Location with WiFi Networks and Hotspots ee ee eens 15 Determine the Location Requirements eee eee eee eee ee 15 Determine the Management VLAN 0 00 cece eee eee eee 16 Plan the Client Authentication and Data Encryption 16 Plan the Hotspots with Free and Paid For Access 000 000s 17 Plan the Usage Policies ce coccssiccssunsessanider verse ereseceseansas 17 Plan the User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots eee reece 17 Other Planning Considerations 5
24. Remove a Floor from a Building 0 cece eee eee eee 51 Change the Name for ABuUdINGs si accececerdaa tenant eacasiecuas ater 52 Remove a Building from a Location 0 c cece eee eee eee 53 Manage WiFi and Global Settings for a Location 00005 54 Manage the WiFi Radio or Radios for a Location 005 54 Manage Load Balancing for Access Points at a Location 97 Manage RF Assignment and Output Power for a Location 58 Assign User Groups to Buildings at a Location 00 61 Change the Password for Access Points Assigned to a Location 62 Select a RADIUS Server for a Location 0 cece eee eee 63 Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location 0000 64 Manage Wireless Quality of Service for a Location 0 64 Chapter 4 Manage WiFi Networks at a Location Add a New WiFi Network to a Location 0 e cece eee eee ees 67 Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network 0 0 cece eee eee 68 Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption 68 Change SSID Broadcast and Client Separation 0 05 72 Change the WiFi Network VLAN Settings 00008 74 Change the WiFi Network Radio Band 0 00 nenna 75 Change the WiFi Network into a Captive Portal by Assigning a Captive Portal ProRes nssnaieetea arw ed co CERN dois te
25. a To the right of the MAC Address column right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts 10 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right 11 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom 12 To sort the table click a table header View Hotspot Usage for a WiFi Network You can view hotspot usage from all types of captive portals in a WiFi network over a monitoring period that you can customize gt To view hotspot usage in a WiFi network 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 220 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 Click the Wireless Networks icon All WiFi networks at the location display 7 Click a WiFi network The summary page for the WiFi network displays 8 Select Hotspot Users gt Hotspot Usage Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v HOTSPOT USERS Trend PDT Connected ti
26. arrow The user group displays in the Deny column To allow WiFi access to a user group in the building select the user group and click the left arrow The user group displays in the Allow column Building Access Controls Enforced Enable Disable Building Allow Deny Lobby and R VIPs AFPConfAttendees Lakeview Group 1 Mountainview Guests Utilities1 Senice Utilities2 PrimeGuests To configure user groups for another building at the same location repeat Step 8 through Step 10 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved Change the Password for Access Points Assigned to a Location You can change the password for the access points that are assigned to the same location This is the password that you need when you want to access the web management interface of an individual cloud managed access point or to access a cloud managed access point over an SSH connection gt To change the password for access points that are assigned to a location T 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 62 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The L
27. cece e eee eee eee 257 Restore the Cloud Configuration File oua 0 0 2 eee eee eee eee 258 Remove a Cloud Configuration Backup File 00000 ee 260 Manage the Access Point Firmware Through the Application 261 Schedule Firmware Upgrades for Cloud Managed Access Points 261 Immediately Upgrade Firmware for Cloud Managed Access Points 262 Automate Firmware Upgrades for Cloud Managed Access Points 264 Manage the Application Users 0 e eee eee eens 264 Invite Others to Become Admin Read Only or Hotspot Clerk Application USErS c6063056eradesaeyuouddgdeeeweeewesdsead eager 265 Accept an Invitation and Set Up a User Account 000 c eee eee 266 Change the Role of an Application User 0 e eee ee eee 267 Change the User Profile Password or Time Zone for Your User Account 267 Change the Basic Application Account Settings 0004 269 View Application Notifications 0 0c cece eee e eee eees 270 Chapter 13 Manage Application Licenses and Tokens Aboutthe Tial PEN sic0cscccncncesdcaqawansaaene rer eawrpesasen ss ae 273 View the Trial Expiration Date During the Trial Period 273 What Happens at the End of the Free Trial Period 273 license Concepts citaccceea uae cede aenandaaatvs re ee wer eeacewe eae e 274 Add a License to a Trial Subscription cece eee eee eee 275 View Li
28. wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Wireless Networks icon All WiFi networks at the location display View and Manage Alarms and Events 246 10 11 12 13 14 15 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Click a WiFi network The summary page for the WiFi network displays Select Event Log Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v Download Full Event Log No Title Source Severity Date PDT 1 Hotspot Voucher Sold GolfWeek Warning 02 08 53PM 04 30 2 Hotspot Voucher Sold GolfWeek Warning 02 09 31PM 04 24 3 Hotspot Voucher Sold GolfWeek Warning 01 59 31PM 04 24 The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the events as Last 30 Days To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right t2st3 ays You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To see details about an event do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the event or click any field in any column for the event b To close the event details click the triangle or field
29. 35 cncere dude eteedaasoassoabaea dans 18 Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access PointsS 00eeeeeeeees 19 Definitions of Access Point TEMS s 5 0222s00acrncsemmegmereaerencurewaeds 20 Chapter 2 Get Started With Cloud Management Strategies for the Initial Configuration 00 c eee eee eee eee 23 Use the Get Started Wizard to Set Up a Location and WiFi Network 23 Set Upa Basic LOCAHON ic csuacerdebudntacudisocde tien Guana are d ac apa b as aiees 29 Set Upa Complex Location 5 0200 ccredengeerevnwnvwwassceececeoenes 33 Chapter 3 Manage Locations Buildings and Floors Adda NEW LOGALION vince cecoote erite rN AEE EPEN ERER TREN 41 Copy the Configuration of One Location and Overwrite the Configuration of Another Location 00 e cece eee eee 42 Change the Basic Settings for a Location Profile 00005 44 Remove a LOCatION cccccccced ene ndaeseeee ee pheeseaudieeseedennennss 44 Manage Buildings and Floors for a Location 00 eee e eee eee eee 45 Add a Building and Floor to a Location 00 00 eee eee 45 Add a Floor toa Building 2 22 05 cdased 6 seddaideagenigeseieeieesaa ssa 46 Add an Access Point toa FOOF a2 e steele cocawimememeumadiae sea cegee ss 47 Manage the Settings for an Access Point on a Floor 05 49 Change the Name and Dimensions of a Floor 0 eee eee 51 Business Central Wireless Manager Application
30. 66 66 DA 94 7E D0 OF 7E ED 66 41 20 06 7E 66 70 7E Import MACs from CSV Download a CSV file template CHOOSE FILE 6 Inthe MAC ACL Name field enter a name that lets you easily identify the MAC ACL 7 Next to Treat List As select a radio button e Allow WiFi devices with MAC addresses on the MAC ACL are allowed access e Deny WiFi devices with MAC addresses on the MAC ACL are denied access This is the default setting 8 Compose the MAC ACL by adding MAC addresses manually by adding MAC addresses that the application detected or by a combination of both methods e Manual method Enter MAC addresses manually in the MAC ACL a In the MAC Address field enter a valid MAC address b Click the ADD button The MAC address displays in the MAC ACL table c To add more MAC addresses repeat Step a and Step b d To remove a MAC address from the list select its check box and click the REMOVE button e Detection method Move all or selected MAC addresses that are detected by the application to the MAC ACL a From the Show available clients at menu select a location or leave the default selection All Locations which shows all WiFi clients at all locations b Either select the check box in the Available Wireless Clients table header or select check boxes for individual MAC addresses Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 144 9 Note Business Central Wireless Manager Application
31. APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Change SSID Broadcast and Client Separation By default the SSID for a network is broadcast and client separation is disabled allowing clients on the same network or hotspot to communicate with each other gt To change the SSID broadcast and client separation for a WiFi network 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 72 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display Click the network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section displays Click the Secur
32. Action menu select Acknowledge Alarm The entries in the Acknowledged column change from No to Yes To clear one several or all alarms do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the alarms or to select all alarms select the check box in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Clear Alarm View and Manage Alarms and Events 250 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The entries are removed from the table and moved to the cleared alarms table see View the Cleared Alarms for an Access Point on page 251 View the Cleared Alarms for an Access Point You can view the cleared alarms for an access point The application can display a maximum of 200 cleared alarms but you can download the entire alarms history as an Excel or csv file To view and download the cleared alarms for an access point 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 Click the Access Points icon All access points assigned to the location display 7 To select the access point do one of the following
33. Add Hotspot Free Manage Hotspots for Locations 154 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Hotspot 1 Add Hotspot Network Add Hotspot Network Enter a name for your hotspot and select which radio bands to make this hotspot available The entered name will be used as the SSID name that users will connect to This network will be created with OPEN authentication Please note that you can configure other authentication types by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Hotspot Name Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and SGHz Specify the following settings e Hotspot Name Enter the name that must serve as the SSID for the hotspot e Wireless Network on From the menu select the WiFi band or bands on which the hotspot must be accessible Click the NEXT button Add Hotspot O 9 Add Hotspot Set Access Network Policy Set Access Policy Set access policy for your hotspot by configuring a Captive Portal Profile You can either create a new profile copy from an existing profile or use existing profile Captive Portal Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Captive Portal Profile Authentication Click Through Client separation will be enable on this network F Redirect users to a specified website after login Select a radio button to specify which type of captive portal must be used for the hotspot You can create a new captive portal for the hotspot copy and
34. Building 1 Floors can help you to organize your access points whereas buildings can also provide some access controls in certain captive portal configurations All networks configured at a location are automatically applied to all access points at that location Typically a single access point can support eight networks per radio If an access point supports only a single radio the application configures the networks only on that radio Offline provisioning is possible You can set up locations and WiFi networks while access points are offline Then add access points and assign them to locations allowing the networks to go online Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 10 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Global Configuration Concepts The application lets you set up global configurations referred to as shared settings for radio on off schedules captive portal profiles RADIUS server profiles usage plans user groups hotspot users and MAC ACLs You can assign these to any location Key Functions The application provides key functions such as provisioning configuring managing and monitoring Provisioning Functions Provisioning lets you add locations WiFi networks and APs Typically you add a location set up a WiFi network and add APs to the location However you can also start by adding APs add locations and WiFi networks and assign the APs to the locations For configuration stra
35. Buildings at a Location e Change the Password for Access Points Assigned to a Location e Select a RADIUS Server for a Location e Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location e Manage Wireless Quality of Service for a Location Manage the WiFi Radio or Radios for a Location All networks configured at a location are automatically applied to all access point at that location and therefore to all available radios at that location Typically a single access point can support eight networks per radio If an access point supports only a single radio the application configures the networks only on that radio Note You cannot disable or enable the radio for an individual WiFi network access point building or floor You can disable or enable the radio only for an entire location Note If a radio is in the Always OFF state or not scheduled automatic radio frequency auto RF assignment does not function For auto RF assignment to function a radio must be either in the Always ON state or scheduled If a radio is scheduled but off according to the schedule auto RF assignment does run because it turns the radio on at the start of the process and turns the radio off at the completion of the process gt To manage the WiFi radio or radios for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 54 Busi
36. Click the ADD button the button with the left arrow The selected MAC addresses display in the MAC ACL table To remove a MAC address from the list select its check box and click the REMOVE button For information about importing a list of MAC addresses see Set Up a MAC ACL by Importing a File with MAC Addresses on page 145 At the right bottom click the ADD THIS MAC ACL button The changes are saved The MAC ACL Control Lists page displays information about the new MAC ACL The MAC ACL does not go into effect until you do the following a Apply the MAC ACL to a location see Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location on page 64 b Configure network authentication with the MAC ACL for a WiFi network at the location see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 Set Up a MAC ACL by Importing a File with MAC Addresses To set up a MAC ACL by importing MAC addresses you must add the MAC addresses to a table in a csv file You can add up to 250 MAC addresses to the table In the table add each MAC address on a single row in the leftmost column The MAC addresses must be in the standard xx xx xx xx xx xx format Do not include a table header Tip You can download a template from the application You use this template to set up your list of MAC addresses For more information see the following procedure AN CAUTION Do not open the csv file with MAC addresses in Excel Excel mig
37. GHz Auto Channel On OOff gt Valid Corporate Channels 5 GHz Auto Channel On Off gt Valid Corporate Channels Tx Power Settings 2 4 GHz Default TX Power 5 GHz Default TX Power 1 Power 1 Power 2 4 GHz Auto Tx Power 5 GHz Auto Tx Power On Off 7 To run the auto RF assignment and automatic Tx power adjustment immediately for both WiFi bands do the following a Make sure that both Auto Channel On radio buttons are selected and that the 2 4 GHz Auto Tx Power On and 5 GHz Auto Tx Power On radio buttons are selected b Click the RUN NOW button 8 To reschedule auto RF assignment and automatic Tx power adjustment do the following a Inthe Schedule Channel and or Power section from the menu select the time at which the auto RF assignment and automatic Tx power adjustment must run By default these processes run every day at 12 00 a m b If you do not want to run these processes every day clear the check boxes for the days on which you do not want these processes to run 9 To select which channels can participate in RF assignment do the following for the 2 4 GHz band 5 GHz band or both bands a Click the Valid Corporate Channels link The page adjusts and displays the enabled channels The page displays only channels that are legally allowed in the country that is configured for the location b To enable channels to participate in RF assignment select the associated check boxes or select the All
38. Get Started With Cloud Management 33 Business Central Wireless Manager Application All Locations Choose Action S2 Add Location E Tad Ratio Schedule Add Captive Portal Profile a SunnyMountainResort Tahoe City United States Add Usage Plan gt SunnyMountainResort Add Radius Server Profile Add User Group Add MAC ACL 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Location Add Location Location Name Country United States Zip Co Street Address Time Zone AP Local Password 6 Specify a location name complete the location address fields select a time zone and set the location specific password for the access points that you can assign to the location Note Entering correct address information allows the location to be displayed on Google Maps Note The password that you must set in this step is the password that you need when you want to access the web management interface of an individual cloud managed access point or to access a cloud managed access point over an SSH connection 7 Click the ADD THIS LOCATION button The application confirms the addition 8 Click the CLOSE button The Location Profile page displays showing information about the new location 9 From the Choose Action menu select Add Building The Building wizard starts Get Started With Cloud Management 34 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Building
39. MAC 1 DD1E15D6 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort 60 34 4B 28 9A 22 1B1829E7 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort 60 33 33 28 9A 82 15 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right 16 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous figure 17 To sort the table click a table header 18 To view more details about one individual hotspot user click the ID in the Identifier column Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 222 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary Clients Event Log Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details OD1E15D6 al CANCEL Summary General Usage Identifier DD1E15D6 Total Tx Bytes 106 81 MB SSID GolfWeek Total Rx Bytes 28 97 MB Location SunnyMountainResort Total of Sessions 1 Current Connection State Disconnected Total Purchase 12 First Connected time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Remaining Time 0d 11h 33m Last Connected Time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Expiration date N A Total Connected Time 0d 0h 26m Trend PDT Details By default the summary for the hotspot user displays 19 To view the trend or the details for the hotspot user click the Trend PDT or Details heading respectively Search the Hotspot Database for a WiFi Network You can search the hotspot database for a WiFi network on the following components each of which comes with a WiFi network requirement
40. MAC ACLs to control user access After you set up a MAC ACL you must apply the MAC ACL to a location see Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location on page 64 and configure network authentication with the MAC ACL for a WiFi network at the location see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 The following sections describe how you can set up and manage MAC ACLs e Set Up a MAC ACL by Adding MAC Addresses Manually e Set Up a MAC ACL by Importing a File with MAC Addresses e Change a MAC ACL e Remove a MAC ACL Set Up a MAC ACL by Adding MAC Addresses Manually You can add MAC addresses manually either by typing the MAC addresses or by moving MAC addresses that the application detects to the MAC ACL You can add up to 250 MAC addresses to a MAC ACL gt To setup a MAC ACL manually 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 143 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add MAC ACL Add MAC ACL MAC ACL Name Treat ListAs Allow Deny Show available clients at All Location E MACACL o I Available Wireless Clients 60
41. Manager Application Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Wireless Networks icon All WiFi networks at the location display Click a WiFi network a T emer meen location2 Summary Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v D WIRELESS NETWORKS All Total Clients and Traffic Last 7 Days PDT 1 000 MB v location2 Health Usage Security v amp Wireless Networks ai0locinett open D al0locinet2 wpa2 Tuesday Wednesday gt BqAccess Points Chents W W Fi Traffic 2 4GHz Clients gt Q sri homeaP Current Network Health Top Talker Clients Last 7 Days 00 00 11 23 15 01 00 00 11 23 15 02 00 00 11 23 15 00 0 00 00 11 23 15 04 APs down 00 00 11 23 15 03 out of 32 00 00 11 23 15 07 00 00 11 23 15 08 The page displays a graph for the total number of clients and amount of traffic in the WiFi network a graph that shows the health of the access points on which the WiFi network is configured and information about the top talkers clients in the WiFi network with their MAC addresses and data consumption The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days and the information in the upper graph for all WiFi traffic To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right tss 7 ays You can select a monitoring period from one
42. Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan Limit access to Permitted access hours Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Use Existing Use From the menu select the existing shared usage plan that you want to use as the hotspot usage plan Click the ADD THIS HOTSPOT button The Network Name and Authentication section displays showing the settings for the new hotspot By default the network authentication is configured as an open system and the hotspot does not provide data encryption For information about how to change the network authentication data encryption and other network settings for the hotspot see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 Add an Advanced Hotspot for Free Access You set up a hotspot by adding it to a location An advanced hotspot with free access lets you customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file the application supports CSS page styling including customized advanced login messages and a custom end user license agreement EULA Note The default splash page for an advanced hotspot is responsive to tablet and smartphone displays Manage Hotspots for Locations 159 Business Central Wireless Manager A
43. On the main page click the Radius Server heading The Radius Server section expands Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 63 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 7 From the Radius Profile menu select a RADIUS server profile 8 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location For you to be able to select a MAC access control list ACL for a location you first must set up a shared MAC ACL see Manage MAC ACLs on page 143 After you select a MAC ACL for a location you can assign that MAC ACL for additional security see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 To select a MAC ACL for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 Inthe LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6 On the main page click the MAC ACL heading The MAC ACL section expands 7 From the Profile for Local MAC ACL menu select a MAC ACL 8 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved Manage Wireless Quality of Service for a Location Wi Fi Multimedia WMM is a subset of the 802 11e standard WMM allows wireless traffic to receive different prior
44. Optional Access To offer a limited period of free WiFi access with a voucher that is in addition to the period purchased with the voucher select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Note If you offer free WiFi access with a voucher you must select a usage plan which you can do later in this procedure Without a usage plan you cannot offer free WiFi access with a voucher Copy From Existing Based on From the menu select the shared captive portal on which you want to base the hotspot captive portal Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication The selection from the menu is fixed at Vouchers Redirect users to a Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Voucher Plan Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the voucher plan Voucher Unit Cost Enter an amount in US The selections from the menus are fixed at connected and Hour The amount that you enter is the cost per hour of connection Optional Free Access By default a voucher does not offer free WiFi access and the selection from the menu is No Optional Access To offer a limited period of free WiFi access with a voucher that
45. Plan the Hotspots with Free and Paid For Access Plan the Usage Policies Plan the User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots Other Planning Considerations Determine the Location Requirements For each location before you set up the location configure the WiFi networks and assign the access points determine its requirements Number of users that must be able to receive WiFi service over managed networks Type of security and encryption for the managed networks Number of users that must be able to receive WiFi service over a WiFi network or hotspot Type of security encryption paid access and free access for the WiFi network or hotspot Number of access points required to provide seamless coverage for all WiFi networks and hotspots through all buildings and floors of the location Number of licenses required to cover all access points at the location 802 11 frequency bands and channels that are optimal for WiFi usage For each large location that you plan to set up NETGEAR recommends that you perform a site survey To determine the current RF behavior and detect both 802 11 and non 802 11 noise run a spectrum analysis of the channels of the site To determine the maximum throughput that is achievable on the client run an access point to client connectivity test Identify potential RF obstructions and interference sources Determine areas where denser coverage might be required because of heavier usage Introduction to the Business Ce
46. Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Voucher Access Settings Voucher Plan Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the voucher plan Usage Limits Optional From the menu select a usage plan for the voucher By default the selection from the menu is No Policy For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Voucher Unit Cost Enter an amount in US The selections from the menus are fixed at connected and Hour The amount that you enter is the cost per hour of connection Optional Free Access By default a voucher does not offer free WiFi access and the selection from the menu is No Optional Access To offer a limited period of free WiFi access with a voucher that is in addition to the period purchased with the voucher select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Note If you offer free WiFi access with a voucher you must select a usage plan Without a usage plan you cannot offer free WiFi access with a voucher Usage Plan If you select Click Through or Click Through With Email from the Optional Free Access menu the Usage Plan menu displays From the Usage Plan menu select a usag
47. The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left scroll down and select MAC ACLs The MAC Access Control Lists page displays Click the MAC ACL The settings for the MAC ACL display Change the settings as needed For more information about the settings see Set Up a MAC ACL by Adding MAC Addresses Manually on page 143 and Set Up a MAC ACL by Importing a File with MAC Addresses on page 145 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved Remove a MAC ACL You can remove a MAC ACL that you no longer need gt To remove a MAC ACL 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 148 Business Central Wireless Manager Application In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left scroll down and select MAC ACLs The MAC Access Control Lists page displays Click the MAC ACL The settings for the MAC ACL display From the Choose Action menu select Delete This MAC ACL A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The MAC ACL is removed Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 149 Manage Hotspots for Locations A hotspot is a W
48. The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Captive Portal Profiles The Captive Portal Profiles page lists all captive portal profiles Select the captive portal profile From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Captive Portal The pop up window that displays depends on whether or not the captive portal profile is in use Take one of the following actions e Ifthe captive portal profile is not in use the Confirmation pop up window displays Do the following Click the OK button The captive portal profile is removed e Ifthe captive portal profile is in use the Captive Portal Profile In Use pop up window displays Do the following a Click the OK button The pop up window closes b Find the location and network or hotspot to which the captive portal profile is assigned c Disassociate the captive portal profile from the network or hotspot d Repeat this procedure to remove the captive portal profile Manage Usage Plans A usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan lets you combine a time limit and a maximum number of allowed concurrent connections per user or voucher in one plan You can include one or both of these restrictions in a single plan The time limit lets you set a maximum number of hours per day week month or year and the permitted access hours during a 24 hour period Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 127 Bu
49. The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Account The My Account page displays 5 Change the settings as needed 6 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 269 Business Central Wireless Manager Application View Application Notifications Application notifications are a different type of notifications from network alarms and network event notifications Application notifications indicate whether new firmware is available and events related to firmware upgrades The severity levels for application notifications are Critical Warning and Info Application notifications are automatically cleared after 30 days Note For information about network alarms and network event notifications for your account a location a WiFi network or an access point see Chapter 11 View and Manage Alarms and Events gt To view the application notifications and mark all notifications as read 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays In the upper right of the page next to Welcome and your user name a mailbox displays If the application generated
50. The entire sentence is Click here to accept the invitation and create your user profile The User Sign Up page displays 2 Under the name of the inviter and your email address specify and confirm a password Your password must contain at least six characters and cannot contain the underscore _ character 3 Save your password and store it in a safe place 4 In the INFOMATION section enter your personal information 5 To view the terms and conditions do the following a Click the Terms and Conditions link A pop up window displays the terms and conditions b Click the AGREE button The pop up window closes 6 Click the Sign Up button A message on the page informs you if the sign up is successful If the sign up is successful you receive a confirmation email 7 Open the NETGEAR Account Confirmation email and click the here link Note The entire sentence is Click here to activate your account and log in The New Account Activation page displays 8 Enter your password 9 Click the ACTIVATE button The application login page displays The options that are available to you as an application user depend on the role that is assigned to you Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 266 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the Role of an Application User Only an admin user the owner is also an admin user of the application can change the role of a read only application u
51. Tokens 276 Business Central Wireless Manager Application TOKENS 2064 TOKENS 58 Available AP Renewal 1 Used This Nv Sort by Date Added Status License Key Tokens Remaining SKU E NG3E06 BDE4 2402 3F3C 8B6B 3F3C 2402 372A BDE4 In Use Status In Use Date Added 2015 01 11 PST Token Remaining 584 SKU WMS0AP1YL 10000S Date Activated 2015 04 11 PDT Token Used 16 07 14 52PM 04 11 2015 PDT 05 00 01PM 04 30 2015 PDT 10 55 39AM 04 24 2015 PDT 05 00 01PM 04 30 2015 PDT 05 00 01PM 04 30 2015 PDT 05 00 04PM 05 31 2015 PDT 05 00 04PM 05 31 2015 PDT 05 05 07PM 07 24 2015 PDT 05 00 58PM 07 02 2015 PDT 05 00 15PM 07 31 2015 PDT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Manage Application Licenses and Tokens 277 Cloud Managed Access Points This appendix includes the following sections e View the Access Point Cloud State in the Application e View the Cloud Connection and Activity Status on a Cloud Enabled Access Point e Convert an Access Point from Cloud Enabled Mode to Standalone Mode Note For information about preparing your NETGEAR wireless access points for cloud management see the NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager Quick Start Guide which you can download from downloadcenter netgear com The following sections also provide information about access points e Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access Points on page 19 e Definitions of Access Point Terms on page 20 278 Business Central
52. Wireless Manager Application View the Access Point Cloud State in the Application The access point cloud state indicates the cloud management state of the access point gt To view the access point cloud state in the application 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click a location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons amp below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click the access point configuration v Access Point Profile Name netgearl137EE8 Serial Number 29210A5W000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F7 17 7E E7 Location SunnyMountainResort Building Building 1 Floor Floor 1
53. a header select the My table has header check box 9 Click the Browse button 10 Navigate to and select the csv file The name of the csv file displays in the Browse to CSV field 11 If the csv file does not include a header clear the My table has header check box 12 Click the UPLOAD button Add Multiple APs Confirm amp Edit Please edit any errors and confirm that all of the information uploaded is correct Name Serial No Errors Remove Charm 23340A5W003D5 Strange 25670A5KL03A3 Top 34056A5Y7Y311 Flute 41756C5K8Y352 Waterbowl 25895C3C892C7 AP already registered GarysHotspot 66712C7889B12 NTGHotell 43340A5W003G5 NTGHotel2 85670A6KLO3D5 NTGHotel3 36656A5Y7Y3E4 GGhhpO 25611C6B892A5 Manage Access Points at a Location 96 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 13 If the application detects an access point that is already registered or if you entered an erroneous serial number correct the serial number on the page or click the associated X icon to remove the name and serial number from the list 14 Click the CONFIRM button Add Multiple APs Upload Confirm amp Edit Licensing Click Add to import these 12 access points if they are powered on and have an internet connection they will connect to the Cloud in a few moments Name Serial No Charm 23340A5W003D5 Strange 25670A5KL03A3 Top 34056A5Y7Y311 41756C5KBY352 DAYS 0 MANAGED Left in trial 14 3 MANAGED z 15
54. aborted for access points at the location The command log is generated for a monitoring period that you can customize You can download the entire command log as an Excel or csv file To view the command log for a location and download it 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 201 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 6 In the MONITORING tree click the Health icon The health summary page for the location displays 7 Select Command Log Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Command Log Event Log Download Full Command Log No Ea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Title Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration AP VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742
55. amp below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point v Access Point Profile Name netgear137EE8 Serial Number 29210A5W000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F 7 17 7E E7 Location State Connected Time Since Power Up 0d 9h 48m Alarms BS ww Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 Manage Access Points at a Location 84 7 10 Business Central Wireless Manager Application From the Location menu select a location The Building menu and Floor menu become available From the Building menu select a building for the location If you did not add a building to the location the menu lists Building1 as the default setting From the Floor menu select a floor for the building If you did not add a floor to the building the menu lists Floor 1 as the default setting Click the APPLY button If you assign or change a location a confirmation pop up window displays This page does not display when you change only a building or floor for the same location Click the YES button The changes are saved Note
56. and Access Points 190 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days For this table you can also select Right Now to display only the clients that are currently connected To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the access points table as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Details link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header View Hotspot Usage for Your Account You can view hotspot usage from all types of captive portals for your account over a monitoring period that you can customize To view hotspot usage for your account 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays Select Hotspot Users gt Hotspot Usage Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 19
57. any backup files 6 Click the BACKUP NOW button CREATE BACKUP Name Description 7 Enter a name for the backup file A description is optional Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 257 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 8 Click the BACKUP button The application confirms the addition of the backup file 9 Click the OK button Created Date PDT X Name Y Description 12 22AM 05 12 2015 BU_1 Includes 2 locations with full configs The backup file is added to the table on the SAVED BACKUPS page Restore the Cloud Configuration File If you backed up your cloud configuration you can restore the configuration to the one in the backup file A CAUTION The restore process replaces your locations WiFi networks an shared settings to the state they were in at the time when you made the backup Locations WiFi networks and shared settings that you created after you made the backup are lost when the restore process is complete To restore the configuration file from a backup file 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left click Backup Restore Manage Maintenance Firmware App
58. application notifications and no one read them the number of notifications is shown on the mailbox 118 in the following figure Welcome Bob Johnson amp b 4 Click the mailbox No Title Source Severity Date New firmware CLOUD Info 03 09 11AM 06 05 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 02 05 57AM 06 05 2015 PDT Rogue AP Detected AP netgear1 Warning 02 20 20PM 06 02 2015 PDT Rogue AP Detected AP netgear Warning 02 20 19PM 06 02 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 05 19 18AM 06 02 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 04 23 12AM 06 01 2015 PDT Firmware upgrade task CLOUD Info 04 38 03PM 05 29 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 04 07 37PM 05 29 2015 PDT Firmware upgrade task CLOUD Info 08 46 07AM 05 29 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 08 33 20AM 05 29 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 02 42 21AM 05 29 2015 PDT Firmware upgrade task CLOUD Info 07 22 15PM 05 26 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 10 48 26PM 05 25 2015 PDT New firmware CLOUD Info 11 33 52PM 05 18 2015 PDT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 270 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the events as Last 30 Days 5 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 25 You can select a monitoring period from o
59. button The User Account page displays showing the new hotspot user account in the table Change an Existing Hotspot User Account You can change the settings for a hotspot user account Note If the hotspot user account was set up automatically when you created a user account in a user group the changes that you make to the hotspot user account also apply to the associated entry in the user group gt To change the settings for a hotspot user account 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations pag e displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 133 Business Central Wireless Manager Application In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left scroll down and select Hotspot Users The Hotspot Users page displays Select the check box for the user account Click the EDIT SELECTED button The EDIT SELECTED USER pop up window displays Change the settings as needed For more information about the settings see View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account on page 131 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a Hotspot User Account You can remove one or more hotspot user accounts that you no longer nee
60. change the radio band for a WiFi network 1 2 10 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display Click the network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section displays Click the Radio heading The Radio section displays From the Enable Wireless Network menu select one of the following options e 2 4GHz and 5GHz The network broadcasts on both the 2 4 GHz band and the 5 GHz band Depending on the WiFi capability of the access points that are assigned to the location this is the default setting e 2 4GHz The network broadcasts on the 2 4 GHz band only e 5GHz The network broadcasts on the 5 GHz band only Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is n
61. country password and time zone for your own user account but not for someone else s account The time zone for your user account is the time zone for time stamps that are associated with data that is separate from locations You cannot change the time zone for an existing location profile Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 267 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note After five unsuccessful login attempts your account is blocked for five minutes While your account is being blocked you can reset and redefine your account password but the account remains blocked for five minutes After five minutes you can attempt to log in to your account with the new password gt To change the user profile password or time zone for your user account 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays In the upper right of the page next to Welcome your user name displays 4 Point to your name and select My Profile User Profile First Name Owen Last Name Ownerofski Email oowthen gmail com Role Owner Phone 1234567890 Country United States Change Password User Preferences 5 To change your user profile as needed enter a first name last name and telephone number and select a co
62. customize an existing captive portal or use an existing captive portal Manage Hotspots for Locations 155 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 10 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Create New Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication Redirect users to a specified website after login From the menu select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required is to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Copy From Existing Based on Captive Portal Profile From the menu select the shared captive portal on which you want to base the captive portal for the hotspot Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication Redirect users to a specified website after login From the menu select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Use Existing Use
63. data encryption an admin user sets up a user account in the hotspot user database for each hotspot user For more information see View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account on page 131 3 An admin user invites someone to set up a hotspot clerk account so that he or she can sell and generate vouchers For more information see Invite Others to Become Admin Read Only or Hotspot Clerk Application Users on page 265 4 The invitee sets up a hotspot clerk account For more information see Accept an Invitation and Sign Up for and Activate a Hotspot Clerk Account on page 180 5 The hotspot clerk sells and generates a voucher for a customer or guest For more information see Sell and Generate a Voucher on page 181 6 The customer or guest accesses the splash page and enters the voucher number 7 The hotspot clerk monitors the voucher status Manage Hotspots for Locations 153 8 Business Central Wireless Manager Application For more information see View the Status of Vouchers for a Hotspot Reprint a Voucher or Delete Vouchers on page 184 The admin monitors the hotspot users and usage For more information see the following sections e View Hotspot Usage for Your Account on page 191 e Search the Hotspot Database for Your Account on page 194 e WiFi Network Level View the Event Log for a WiFi Network on page 246 Add a Basic Hotspot for Free Access You set up a hotspot by adding it to a l
64. database for a location on the following components each of which comes with a WiFi network requirement e Client MAC address A WiFi network must be set up as a click through hotspot or a voucher hotspot with limited free access that requires the user to click through e Email address A WiFi network must be set up as a click through hotspot for which an email address is required or a voucher hotspot with limited free access that requires the user to click through with an email address e User name A captive portal for cloud AAA authentication must be assigned to a WiFi network A hotspot user must sign in with a user name and password e Voucher ID The WiFi network must be set up as voucher hotspot gt To search the hotspot database for user activity at a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 211 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Usage icon The usage summary page for the location displays Select Hotspot Users gt
65. do not need to remove it from its location For information about reassigning an access point from one location building or floor to another see Assign an Access Point to a Location on page 84 Manage Access Points at a Location 93 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To remove an access point from your account 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons am below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click the access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point From the Choose Action menu select Delete this Access Point A confirmati
66. gt To add a radio on off schedule 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Radio Schedule Add Radio On Off Schedule Schedule Name Schedule Radio On Off On Off Schedule On M 7 w T Radio On time h rs mins Radio OFF time 30 AN hrs mins 6 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Schedule Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the schedule Schedule Radio On Off Select the On radio button You cannot configure the schedule while the Off radio button is selected and the schedule is disabled Note After you add the schedule you can turn it off Schedule On Select the check boxes for the days on which the schedule must be effective Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles 102 7 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Radio On time Enter the time or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to specify the time on which the schedule turns on To specify AM or PM you must use the arrow keys Radio OFF time Enter the time or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to specify the time on which
67. header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table 16 To view more information about the access point that is the source of the alarm click a field in the Source column The summary page for the access point displays For more information see View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point on page 226 17 To acknowledge one several or all alarms do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the alarms or to select all alarms select the check box in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Acknowledge Alarm The entries in the Acknowledged column change from No to Yes 18 To clear one several or all alarms do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the alarms or to select all alarms select the check box in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Clear Alarm The entries are removed from the table and moved to the cleared alarms table see View the Cleared Alarms for a Location on page 242 View the Cleared Alarms for a Location You can view the cleared alarms for a location The application can display a maximum of 200 cleared alarms but you can download the entire alarms history as an Excel or csv file gt To view and download the cl
68. heading The Captive Portal section displays 9 From the Captive Portal menu select one of the following authentication options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email An email address is required to click through e Vouchers A voucher is required to access the network e Cloud AAA A user name and password are required to sign in If you select Cloud AAA from the Captive Portal menu select one or more user groups that are allowed access to the network a In the Denied Groups column select a group and click the right arrow The user group displays in the Allowed Groups column b To allow more groups access to the network repeat the previous step Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 76 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application c To move a group back to the Denied Groups column select the group and click the left arrow Note Your selection from the Captive Portal menu determines which captive portal profiles are listed in the Captive Portal Profile menu From the Captive Portal Profile menu select an associated profile If the type of profile that you want to assign is not listed you can set up a new captive portal profile For more information see the following sections e Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 111 Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Clou
69. hotspot Authentication From the menu select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Redirect users to a Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Copy From Existing Based on From the menu select the shared captive portal on which you want to base the captive portal for the hotspot Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication From the menu select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Manage Hotspots for Locations 161 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Redirect users to a Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Use Existing Use From the menu select the shared captive portal that you want to use as the captive portal for the hotspot 11 Take one of the following actions e If you selected the Use Existing radio button go to Step 20 e If you selected the Create New or Copy Fro
70. in the Network Key field select the Show Characters check box Key 1 through Key 4 If you select a WEP option do the following 1 Click the GENERATE KEYS button The application generates four keys 2 As an option change individual keys manually 3 Select the Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 or Key 4 radio button The selected key contains the string that is required to access the WiFi network Shared Key Shared Key authentication uses a WEP key for network authentication and encryption Data Encryption Select one of the following options from the menu e 64 bit WEP Uses a 10 digit hexadecimal key e 128 bit WEP Uses a 26 digit hexadecimal key e 152 bit WEP Uses a 32 digit hexadecimal key Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 70 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Settings Description Network Key Enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters The default network key is sharedsecret Note To show the characters in the Network Key field select the Show Characters check box Key 1 through Key 4 Do the following 1 Click the GENERATE KEYS button 2 Select the Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 or Key 4 radio button The selected key contains the string that is required to access the WiFi network Legacy 802 1x Authentication occurs through the RADIUS server that you selected for the location at which the network is configured see Select a RADIUS Server for a Location
71. is in addition to the period purchased with the voucher select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Note If you offer free WiFi access with a voucher you must select a usage plan which you can do later in this procedure Without a usage plan you cannot offer free WiFi access with a voucher Manage Hotspots for Locations 174 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Use Existing Use From the menu select the shared captive portal that you want to use as the captive portal for the hotspot 11 Click the NEXT button Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Set Usage Network Policy Plans Set Usage Plans Set usage limits for your hotspot by choosing time and login limits You can either create a new usage usage plan copy from an existing usage plan and use existing usage plan Voucher Plan TTaccess Set additional usage limit No Usage limit plan Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Usage Plan Name Limit access to Hours per Month Permitted access hours 12 00 AM to 12 00 AM Allow concurrent connections per voucher Usage Limits for Free Access sage limit plan Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing cs cost N The previous figure shows a configuration in which free access is offered see the options in
72. location The buildings and floors on which the access points are installed The number of expected clients at each building and floor The number of expected clients for each access point gt To manage load balancing for access points at a location 1 2 3 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 57 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 Inthe LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6 Click the Load Balancing heading v Load Balancing 2 4GHz Max Wireless Clients WNAP210 32 WNAP320 64 WNDAP350 50 WNDAP360 50 WNDAP660 128 5GHz Max Wireless Clients WNDAP350 50 WNDAP360 50 WNDAP660 128 By default for each supported type of access point and the band or bands that it supports the maximum number of supported clients is allowed 7 To change the number of allowed clients for the access points that are assigned to the location enter other values in the fields Note Ignore the types of access points that are not in use at the location 8 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed a
73. menu that becomes available select a channel Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage Access Points at a Location 90 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Configure Static Output Power for an Access Point By default the transmission output for an access point is set to maximum power However you can configure a lower output power for each WiFi band that the access point supports To configure static output power for an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons a below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more informati
74. not in an individual building or on a floor only e An access point is assigned to a floor in a building at a location but carries all WiFi networks that broadcast at that location e All access points at a location function with the same WiFi and global settings for that location see Manage WiFi and Global Settings for a Location on page 54 If you disable the broadcast of a WiFi network the WiFi network stops broadcasting at the entire location That is you cannot stop a WiFi network from broadcasting in a particular building only or on a particular floor only It s either on or off for the entire location However you can circumvent these limitations by setting up more than one location Consider the following example In a single building for example a high rise multifloor tower you want to use the application to manage the WiFi networks and hotspots through the cloud The configuration of companies in the building varies Some companies occupy an entire floor some companies share a floor and some companies occupy more than one floor Each floor requires at least one access point and each company requires at least one WiFi network but some floors require more access points and some companies require more WiFi networks All companies are connected to the Internet through the same high speed broadband WAN connection The following three scenarios cover configuration options for the building e For a company that occupies a singl
75. offered see the options in Step 10 and in which you can set usage limits for both voucher access and free access Multiple combinations are possible Note If you do not assign a usage plan to the hotspot Internet access for a voucher user is terminated automatically after 48 hours of usage Take one of the actions that are described in the following table Action Details Voucher limits Set usage limits for voucher access You did not select free access in No free access Step 10 1 Select the Yes radio button 2 Go to Step 13 3 In the Voucher Plan section specify the usage plans for voucher access Voucher limits Set usage limits for voucher access You selected free access in Free access with limits Step 10 and must set usage limits for free access 1 Select the Yes radio button 2 Go to Step 13 3 Inthe Voucher Plan section specify the usage plan for voucher access 4 Inthe Usage Limits for Free Access section specify the usage plan for free access No voucher limits Do not set usage limits for voucher access You selected free access in Free access with limits Step 10 and must set usage limits for free access 1 Leave the No radio button selected which is the default setting 2 Go to Step 13 3 In the Usage Limits for Free Access section specify the usage plan for free access No voucher limits Do not set usage limits for voucher access You did not select free No free access access in Step 10
76. on page 63 Data Encryption The selection from the menu is fixed at None WPA with Radius Authentication occurs through the RADIUS server that you selected for the location at which the network is configured Data Encryption Select one of the following options from the menu TKIP Supports Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP only This is the default selection e TKIP AES Supports both TKIP and Advanced Encryption Standard AES WPA2 with Radius Authentication occurs through the RADIUS server that you selected for the location at which the network is configured see Select a RADIUS Server for a Location on page 63 Data Encryption Select one of the following options from the menu e AES Supports Advanced Encryption Standard AES only This is the default selection e TKIP AES Supports both TKIP and Advanced Encryption Standard AES WPA amp WPA2 with Radius Authentication occurs through the RADIUS server that you selected for the location at which the network is configured see Select a RADIUS Server for a Location on page 63 Data Encryption The selection from the menu is fixed at TKIP AES WPA PSK This type of legacy authentication can authenticate only devices that support WPA Data Encryption Select one of the following options from the menu TKIP Supports Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP only This is the default selection e TKIP AES Supports both TKIP and Advanced Encryption Standar
77. on the main page click the access point configuration e If many access points are assigned to the location and you know the building and floor to which the access point is assigned do the following a In the MONITORING tree click the building and then the floor b In the MONITORING tree click the access point e f many access points are assigned to the application and you do not know the building and floor do the following a On the main page use the icons amp below the Choose Action menu to search for the access point b On the main page click the access point configuration The summary page for the access point displays Select Active Alarms Summary Clients Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Download Full Active Alarms a Acknowledged Title Source Severity No Firmware upgrade failed AP VW612 35 334408 Critical The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the active alarms as Last 30 Days View and Manage Alarms and Events 249 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a Right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right
78. or more licenses to an account with a paid for subscription gt To view licenses or add a license to an account with a paid for subscription 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left select Licenses TOKENS 2064 TOKENS 58 Available AP Renewal Used This Month Sort by Date Added Status License Key Tokens Remaining SKU R NG3E06 BDE4 2402 3F3C 8B6B 3F 3C 2402 372A BDE4 In Use The licenses display along with the number of tokens that are still available the month and year in which the license must be renewed and the number of tokens that are in the current month From the Choose Action menu select Add License The ADD LICENSE pop up window displays Enter or copy one or more license keys that you obtained from your local reseller or from NETGEAR In the pop up window click the ADD LICENSE button The license or licenses are validated and added to the application and display along with the number of tokens that are still available the date that the license must be renewed and the average number of tokens used per month To view details about a license and its usage click the license key Manage Application Licenses and
79. or more radio on off schedules that you no longer need gt To remove radio on off schedules 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Radio On Off Schedules The Radio On Off Schedules page displays 6 Select the check boxes for the radio on off schedules 7 Click the DELETE SELECTED button A confirmation pop up window displays 8 Click the YES button The schedules are removed Manage RADIUS Server Profiles After you configure a RADIUS server profile you first must apply the profile to a location Then for any network at that location you can apply the RADIUS server profile to one of the following network authentication methods e WPA amp WPA2 with RADIUS e WPA2 with RADIUS e WPA with RADIUS e Legacy 802 1x You can use one RADIUS server profile simultaneously for multiple locations and networks However all networks at one location share the same RADIUS server For information about applying a RADIUS server profile to a location see Select a RADIUS Server for a Location on page 63 For information about applying a RADIUS server profile to a network authentication method see Change the WiFi Netw
80. page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left select Settings gt Firmware Report Model Version Release Date PDT Status When PDT WNDAP350 219 220 04 21 2015 Scheduied 04 25 2015 In the Model column of the table click a model access point Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 262 Business Central Wireless Manager Application RELEASE NOTES UPGRADE NOW Firmware Version 2 19 22 0 AP Model WNDAP350 Release Date 04 21 2015 PDT Upgrade Scheduled At 06 00 PM 04 25 2015 PDT Summary 7 To view the firmware release notes for the selected model click the RELEASE NOTES button 8 To upgrade the firmware for all cloud managed access points of the selected model click the UPGRADE NOW button The upgrade progress displays on the page RELEASE NOTES Firmware Version 2 19 22 0 AP Model WNDAP350 Release Date 04 21 2015 PDT Started 04 11 PM 04 22 2015 PDT Summary Upgrade Progress Show Location ll Location When the upgrade is complete the upgrade status displays on the page RELEASE NOTES Firmware Version 2 19 22 0 AP Model WNDAP350 Release Date 04 21 2015 PDT Started 04 11 PM 04 22 2015 PDT Completed 04 15 PM 04 22 2015 PDT Summary Type of Upgrade State APs Upgraded 1 Times Retried 0 Upgraded win Ret Upgraded with Re le Failed to Upgrade Time to Upgrade 0d 0h 4m Upgrade Progress Sh
81. process select which components are included and create or overwrite those components for an existing location For example if you want to set up a new location that is based on an existing location with all or part of its configuration configure a simple location profile without WiFi networks and access points select and copy the components of the existing location and overwrite the simple location profile gt To copy the configuration of one location and overwrite the configuration of another location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays To first set up a new simple location that you then can overwrite with the configuration of an existing location do the following a From the Choose Action menu select Add Location The Add Location page displays b Specify a location name complete the location address fields and select a time zone Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 42 6 7 8 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application c Click the ADD THIS LOCATION button The application confirms the addition d Click the CLOSE button The new location displays in the LOCATIONS tree In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of th
82. remove the floor redefine it under another building and reassign an access point to the floor gt To change the name and dimensions of a floor 1 2 10 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click a location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display In the LOCATIONS tree click a building The floors at the building display Click the floor The floor fields display Change the name dimensions or both Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a Floor from a Building You can remove a floor that you no longer need If an access point is assigned to the floor the access point is removed from the location and returned to default settings gt To remove a floor from a building 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 51 10 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page d
83. right side You can select the center or left radio button e To customize the image on the splash page click the UPLOAD button navigate to an image and upload it to the application Header By default the header text is Welcome You can customize this text Manage Hotspots for Locations 170 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Text If you do not offer a period of free access with the voucher the default text that displays on the splash page is To access Internet please enter your purchased voucher ID You can customize this text If you do offer a period of free access with the voucher the default text that displays on the splash page is To access Internet please enter your purchased voucher ID or continue with limited free access You can also customize this text To preview the splash page click the PREVIEW button The fields and buttons that the splash page displays depend on whether you offer a period of free access with the voucher You cannot customize these fields or buttons e No Optional Access The splash page shows the default text or your customized text a field in which the user must enter the voucher number and the Submit button that the user must click to obtain paid access Click Through The splash page shows the default text or your customized text a field in which the user must enter the voucher number and the Submit button that the user must cl
84. shows all hotspot users However if you did not yet add any hotspot user accounts the Hotspot Users page show only User 1 in Group 1 the default user in the default user group 6 Click the ADD USER button ADD USER Usemame Full Name Password Usage Plan User Group Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 132 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 7 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Username Enter a user for the hotspot user This is the name that the hotspot user must enter on the splash page as part of the authentication process to gain network access Full Name As an option enter the full name of the hotspot user Password Enter a password for the hotspot user A password must contain at least eight characters This is the password that the hotspot user must enter on the splash page as part of the authentication process to gain network access Usage Plan As an option from the menu select a usage plan or leave the default No Policy selection For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 User Group As an option from the menu select a user group or leave the default No Group selection Note You can add the hotspot user to a user group later see Add an Existing Hotspot User Accounts to a User Group on page 138 8 Click the ADD
85. slightly differently from the way it is described in this procedure and includes an extra page that lets you select a location 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location 6 From the Choose Action menu select Add Hotspot Voucher Manage Hotspots for Locations 172 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Hotspot 1 Add Hotspot Network Add Hotspot Network Enter a name for your hotspot and select which radio bands to make this hotspot available The entered name will be used as the SSID name that users will connect to This network will be created with OPEN authentication Please note that you can configure other authentication types by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Hotspot Name Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and 5GHz Specify the following settings e Hotspot Name Enter the name that must serve as the SSID for the hotspot e Wireless Network on From the menu select the WiFi band or bands on which the hotspot must be accessible Click the NEXT button Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Network Policy Set Access Policy Set access policy for your hotspot by configuring a Captive Portal Profile You can either create a new profile copy from an ex
86. the Add Hotspot link on the Home page in which case the hotspot wizard functions slightly differently from the way it is described in this procedure and includes an extra page that lets you select a location Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location From the Choose Action menu select Add Hotspot Voucher Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Network Enter a name for your hotspot and select which radio bands to make this hotspot available The entered name will be used as the SSID name that users will connect to This network will be created with OPEN authentication Please note that you can configure other authentication types by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Hotspot Name Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and SGHz Specify the following settings Hotspot Name Enter the name that must serve as the SSID for the hotspot e Wireless Network on From the menu select the WiFi band or bands on which the hotspot must be accessible Click the NEXT button Manage Hotspots for Locations 165 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Network Policy Set Access Policy Set access policy for your hotspot by configuring a Captive Portal Profile You c
87. the Password for Unassigned Access Points If you add access points to the application but do not assign them to locations as a security measure the application automatically assigns a password to the unassigned access points This is the password that you need when you want to access the web management interface of an individual cloud managed access point or to access a cloud managed access point over an SSH connection The password applies to all unassigned access points You can view this password and change it Note When you assign an access point to a location the password for the access point changes from the password for unassigned access points to the location specific password that you specified when you added the location Manage Access Points at a Location 99 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To view or change the password for unassigned access points 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left select Settings gt Account Setting The Account Setting page displays To view the password select the Show Characters check box To change the password do the following a Inthe Unassigned AP Local Password field ent
88. the schedule turns off To specify AM or PM you must use the arrow keys Click the ADD THIS RADIO ON OFF button The Radio On Off Schedules page displays The new schedule is listed in the table Change Disable or Enable a Radio On Off Schedule You can change disable or enable a radio on off schedule The change affects all locations for which the schedule is in effect To change disable or enable a radio on off schedule 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Radio On Off Schedules The Radio On Off Schedules page displays Select the check box for the radio on off schedule Click the EDIT SELECTED button The EDIT SELECTED SCHEDULE pop up window displays Change the settings disable the schedule or enable the schedule For more information about the settings see Add a Radio On Off Schedule on page 102 Note You cannot configure the schedule while the Off radio button is selected Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles 103 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Remove Radio On Off Schedules You can remove one
89. the trial period you can purchase access point licenses to continue with the application without service interruption That is you can convert your account with a free trial subscription to an account with a paid for subscription For more information see Add a License to a Trial Subscription on page 275 1 By default an account with a free trial subscription or paid for subscription can support up to 4 000 access points Manage Application Licenses and Tokens 273 Business Central Wireless Manager Application If you decide not to purchase access point licenses you gradually lose access to the application and its networks e The day after the end of the trial period the one week grace period starts and access to the application is limited to the Home page Monitoring Summary with the possibility to purchase and add access point licenses e During the one week grace period the access points maintain their configuration and continue to provide WiFi access and connectivity including guest access and authentication cloud services e Seven days after the end of trial period the grace period ends Access points that are managed by the application are automatically reset to their factory default configuration but without WiFi broadcast enabled The access points are not removed from the account To use the access points you must reprovision them on an account with a paid for subscription or reprovision them with a NETGEAR hardwa
90. time zones The application integrates Google Maps to display the locations For each location you can monitor its health usage and security as well as its WiFi networks building floors and access points Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 9 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The following diagram shows the location based hierarchy of the application Cloud management account NETGEAR cloud server ecococooooooo aye e rs h v e e s e Pid ba i e e e e e e he e i 3 e e e Location ze Location S Location Coffee shop Hotel rs Dental office SS 2 Access points 3 WiFi networks 1 Access point SSID clients 2 WiFi networks SSID staff 6 Access points SSID doctor SSID corporate 4 WiFi networks SSID patients SSID guests SSID VIPs SSID staff SSID management Figure 1 Locations with their access points and WiFi networks Automatic Network Provisioning Concepts With standalone access points you add a WiFi network to an access point With the application the entire provisioning process is location based You add a WiFi network to a location and you add an access point to a floor in a building at a location By default each location that you set up includes a default building Building 1 and default floor Floor 1 If you do not specify buildings and floors all access points that you add for a location are automatically assigned to Floor 1 in
91. who signed up for the application account and owns the account An owner can perform any action including setting up and removing accounts for admin users hotspots clerks and read only users Admin A user who can perform administration related functions An admin user is authorized to perform all application functions including setting up and removing accounts for admin users hotspots clerks and read only users Hotspot clerk A user who can sell and print vouchers and monitor their use for hotspots Read only A user who can only monitor and view BCWM functions This manual is primarily intended for cloud network administrators admin users but also contains useful information for hotspot clerks see Chapter 9 Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 14 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Plan a Location with WiFi Networks and Hotspots Before you set up a location with one or more large WiFi networks plan accordingly and perform a site survey so that you can determine how many access points the location requires Plan the types of network authentication and data encryption for WiFi access the nature of hotspots whether you need usage plans and which user groups you must set up The following sections describe planning concepts Determine the Location Requirements Determine the Management VLAN Plan the Client Authentication and Data Encryption
92. your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 45 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 Inthe LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6 From the Choose Action menu select Add Building The Add Building page displays 7 Specify a name for the building 8 Click the ADD THIS BUILDING button The application confirms the addition 9 Click the Add Floor link Add Floor Floor Name Floor Length Floor Width In Building 10 Specify a floor name the floor length in feet and the floor width in feet 11 From the In Building menu select the building to which you want to add the floor 12 Click the ADD THIS FLOOR button The application confirms the addition 13 Click the CLOSE button The Location Profile page displays again 14 In the LOCATION tree click the Access Points heading that displays under the location for which you just added a building and floor The buildings at the location display including the building that you just added 15 In the LOCATION tree click the building to which you added the floor The floors in the building display including the floor that you just added Add a Floor to a Building You can add multiple floors to a building gt To add a floor to a building at a location 1 Open a browser on
93. your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 46 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of the building to which you want to add a floor From the Choose Action menu select Add Floor Add Floor Floor Name Floor Length Floor Width In Building Specify a floor name the floor length in feet and the floor width in feet Leave the selection from the In Building menu as is You already selected the building in Step 7 Click the ADD THIS FLOOR button The application confirms the addition Click the CLOSE button In the LOCATION tree the floor that you just added shows under the building Add an Access Point to a Floor The application provides various ways in which you can add an access point One way is to add an access point to a floor directly For other ways to add an access point see the following sections Add an Access Point and Assign It to a Building and Floor on page 80 Add an Acc
94. 1 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms EventLog Hotspot Users v Trend PDT Connected time Paid vs Free Details The page displays trend graphs for the connected time for both paid and free captive portal access The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right ts 702s You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To view details point to a graph To view only paid access remove the free access trend from the graph by clicking the blue Free button once To view only free access remove the paid access trend from the graph by clicking the red Paid button once To view other aspects of the hotspot usage and adjust the graph take one of the following actions e To view the number of paid devices versus free devices from the menu on the upper right select Number of Devices Paid vs Free e To view the traffic in bytes of paid devices versus free devices from the menu on the upper right select Traffic bytes Paid vs Free By default the graph show the connected time of devices with paid access versus the connected time of devices with free access To view details about hotspot users click the Details heading Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 192 Business Central Wireless Manager A
95. 1 F5 0A FA A8 AP 20 4E 7F 42 D7 08 AP E0 91 F5 0A F2 88 AP E0 91 F5 0A F6 C8 AP 30 46 94 1A D5 C8 amen Aer an aan Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical 05 13 12PM 04 29 2015 10 06 18AM 04 10 2015 02 02 13PM 04 16 2015 02 01 58PM 04 16 2015 02 02 13PM 04 16 2015 02 02 08PM 04 16 2015 02 02 08PM 04 16 2015 02 03 17PM 04 16 2015 02 03 17PM 04 16 2015 02 01 40PM 04 16 2015 02 03 26PM 04 16 2015 02 03 10PM 04 16 2015 02 01 35PM 04 16 2015 02 01 21PM 04 16 2015 02 02 58PM 04 16 2015 The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the cleared alarms as Last 30 Days To select which columns are shown in the table do the following Right click anywhere in the table header a A pop up window displays Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 220 243 View and Manage Alarms and Events 10 11 12 13 14 15 Business Central Wireless Manager Application You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days or you can select to display all entries in the cleared alarms database To see details about an alarm do the following a Click the triangle at the le
96. 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 VW742 35 431208 Status Successful In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress Started PDT ire 12 09 29AM 05 01 2015 Q 12 09 00AM 05 01 2015 12 08 36AM 05 01 2015 12 08 07AM 05 01 2015 12 07 51AM 05 01 2015 12 07 32AM 05 01 2015 12 07 15AM 05 01 2015 12 06 50AM 05 01 2015 12 06 29AM 05 01 2015 12 06 05AM 05 01 2015 12 05 49AM 05 01 2015 12 05 39AM 05 01 2015 12 05 03AM 05 01 2015 12 04 46AM 05 01 2015 12 04 16AM 05 01 2015 The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the command log as Last 7 Days The information in the Title column lists the command name The information in the Error Category column lists the type of error The other columns in the table are self explanatory To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a Right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 70a You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to seven days For most monitor
97. 5 Click the START button Get Started Add Service Location Enter details about the location where your Access Points will be deployed for wireless service Location Name cc EEA 6 Specify a location name complete the location address fields select a time zone and set the location specific password for the access points that you can assign to the location Get Started With Cloud Management 24 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note Entering correct address information allows the location to be displayed on Google Maps Note The password that you must set in this step is the password that you need when you want to access the web management interface of an individual cloud managed access point or to access a cloud managed access point over an SSH connection 7 Click the NEXT button Get Started Add Wireless Network Enter a name for the wireless network that you want to make available at the newly created location Network Name Wireless Networkon 2 4GHz and SGHz Network Authentication WPAIWPA2 PSK Data Encryption TKIP AES Network Key Show Characters 8 Configure the network settings a In the Network Name field enter a WiFi network name SSID b From the Wireless Network on menu select the WiFi band or bands You can select both bands to be active but such a configuration affects only dual band access points c From the Network Authentication menu select the type of au
98. AC ACL Name Treat List As Allow Deny Show available clients at All Location M macact 3 W Available Wireless Clients F 3C A9F4 45 E6E4 20 5476 1F B4 44 84 3A 48 95 2E F2 an remove Import MACs from CSV Download a CSV file template CHOOSE FILE oct ee 15 At the right bottom click the ADD THIS MAC ACL button The changes are saved The MAC ACL Control Lists page displays information about the new MAC ACL The MAC ACL does not go into effect until you do the following a Apply the MAC ACL to a location see Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location on page 64 b Configure network authentication with the MAC ACL for a WiFi network at the location see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 147 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change a MAC ACL You can change the name of a MAC ACL add MAC addresses to an ACL remove MAC addresses from an ACL and switch an ACL that allows access to an ACL that denies access or the other way around A MAC ACL can contain up to 250 MAC addresses gt To change a MAC ACL 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration
99. Access To offer a limited period of free WiFi access with a voucher that is in addition to the period purchased with the voucher select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Note If you offer free WiFi access with a voucher you must select a usage plan which you can do later in this procedure Without a usage plan you cannot offer free WiFi access with a voucher Use Existing Use From the menu select the shared captive portal that you want to use as the captive portal for the hotspot 11 Click the NEXT button Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Network Policy Set Usage Plans Set usage limits for your hotspot by choosing time and login limits You can either create a new usage usage plan copy from an existing usage plan and use existing usage plan Voucher Plan TTaccess Set additional usage limit No Usage limit plan Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Usage Plan Name Limit access to Hours per Month Permitted access hours 12 00 AM to 12 00 AM Allow concurrent connections per voucher Usage Limits for Free Access Usage limit plan Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing ca coc E Manage Hotspots for Locations 167 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The previous figure shows a configuration in which free access is
100. Advanced Image Add Captive Customize CP Portal Profile Profile Alignment lef center right UPLOAD Welcome Please click Continue for free Internet access cot eoe Make sure that the Basic radio button is selected This radio button is selected by default Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 112 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 9 Customize the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Image In relation to the splash page that welcomes the users you can perform the following tasks e By default the right radio button is selected and the image on the splash page is aligned at the right side You can select the center or left radio button To customize the image on the splash page click the UPLOAD button navigate to an image and upload it to the application Header By default the header text is Welcome You can customize this text Text The default text and components that display on the splash page depend on the type of authentication For all these types of captive portals you can customize the text but not the fields and button To preview this splash page click the PREVIEW button e Click Through The splash page shows the default text Please click Continue for free Internet access or your customized text and the Continue button that the user must click Click Through With Email The splash page shows the default tex
101. Alarms and Events for a Location on page 240 View the Health Summary for a Location You can view the health summary for a location including the trend of alarms and information about access points by alarm and connection time over a monitoring period that you can customize gt To view the health summary for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Inthe MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 In the MONITORING tree click the Health icon Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 198 Business Central Wireless Manager Application location2 Summary MONTTORNG Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Command Log Event Log z All Trend of Alarms PDT 9 location2 be usage Security gt Gq Wireless Networks gt BpAccess Points H sri nomeaP 0 Friday Saturday APs by Alarms and Connected Time ACCESS POINT CONNECTED ALARMS VWT7 14 35 86 99 VW732 35 0A 99 VW612 35 33 99 VW724 35 86 99 VW633 35 1A VW734 35 13 VW741 35 0B Reed Ave mi Ave LA ot PRP The page displays the trend of alarms and informat
102. Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 136 Business Central Wireless Manager Application b To move more user accounts to the group repeat the previous step c To move a user account back to the Users Not In Group column select the user name and click the left arrow 11 Click the ADD THIS USER button The changes are saved The User Group page displays information about the new user group and shows the hotspot user accounts in the table Add a New Hotspot User Account to a User Group If you want to assign a usage plan to a hotspot user account first add the usage plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 To add a new user hotspot account to a user group 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left scroll down and select User Groups The All User Groups page displays 6 Click the user group Name Guests Usage Plan DailyLiberal User Name v Full Name X User Group v Created v psmith Peggy Smith DaiyLiberal Guests 11 06 14 cclocking Gary Clocking DailyStrictLimit Guests 11 06 14 hzompfer Hans Zompfer Premier Guests 11 06 14 abelabwat Abir Belabwat Premier Guests 11 06 14 DELETE S
103. D ACCESS POINTS Download Full Details No Name Status Alarm State AP Uptime MAC T m rene o tT 1 VW612 35 334408 Healthy Critical 10d 4h 15m E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 VW614 35 86F788 Healthy Critical 27d 14h 30m 20 4E 7F 86 F7 88 VW743 35 F80D00 Healthy Critical 24 1h 34m 00 26 F2 F8 0D 08 VW742 35 431208 Healthy Healthy 0d 20h 2m 20 4E 7F 43 12 08 VW741 35 0B07E8 Healthy Critical 240 1h 36m E0 91 F5 0B 07 E8 VW734 35 13E808 Healthy Critical 24 1h 32m 0 91 F5 13 E8 08 VW731 35 86FBA8 Healthy Healthy 0d 20h 0m 20 4E 7F 86 FB A8 VW613 35 0AFAA8 Healthy Critical 27 14h 25m E0 91 F5 0A FAAS VW623 35 13E888 Healthy Critical 24 1h 53m E0 91 F5 13 E8 88 VW624 35 0AFE68 Healthy Critical 240 1h 52m E0 91 F5 0AFE 68 VW622 35 F7D880 Healthy Critical 24 1h 53m 00 26 F2 F7 D8 88 VW631 35 13E8A8 Healthy Healthy 0d 20h 3m E0 91 F5 13 E8 A8 VW634 35 86E568 Healthy Critical 24 1h 46m 20 4E 7F 86 E5 68 VW644 35 86EA68 Healthy Critical 240 1h 46m 20 4E 7F 86 EA 68 VW642 35 86F8C8 Healthy Critical 244 1h 45m 20 4E 7F 86 F8 C8 VW633 35 1AD5C8 Healthy Critical 24d 1h 45m 30 46 9A 1A D5 C8 e 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SEJ ek gt MEAN gt PoR a Oo amp WH o The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the MANAGED ACCESS POINTS table as Last 7 Days The columns in the table are self explanatory 6 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 7 ays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks
104. ELECTED EDIT SELECTED ADD NEW USER ADD EXISTING USERS 7 Click the ADD NEW USER button Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 137 Business Central Wireless Manager Application ADD USER Username Full Name Password Usage Plan User Group Guests mo Ea 8 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Username Full Name Enter a user for the hotspot user This is the name that the hotspot user must enter on the splash page as part of the authentication process to gain network access As an option enter the full name of the hotspot user Password Enter a password for the hotspot user A password must contain at least eight characters This is the password that the hotspot user must enter on the splash page as part of the authentication process to gain network access Usage Plan As an option from the menu select a usage plan or leave the default No Policy selection Note The user group and individual user accounts can be assigned different usage plans The usage plan for an individual user account overrides the usage plan for the user group User Group This is a nonconfigurable field that displays the name of the user group 9 Click the ADD button The new user account is added to the user group Add an Existing Hotspot User Accounts to a User Group If you added hotspot user accounts dir
105. GEAR provides a 30 day grace period during which you can add a license and convert your account to a paid for subscription gt To add a license to an account with a trial subscription 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left select Licenses The number of days that are left in the trial period and the number of cloud managed access points display Click the ADD LICENSE button The ADD LICENSE pop up window displays Enter or copy one or more license keys that you obtained from your local reseller or from NETGEAR In the pop up window click the ADD LICENSE button The license or licenses are validated and added to the application and display along with the number of tokens that are still available the date that the license must be renewed and the average number of tokens used per month To view details about a license click the license key The status date added SKU date activated remaining tokens and tokens used display Manage Application Licenses and Tokens 275 Business Central Wireless Manager Application View Licenses or Add a License to an Account with a Paid For Subscription You can view your licenses and add one
106. IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Usage icon Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 204 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Configuration Monitoring Inventory location2 Statistics Usage Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v Total Clients and Traffic PDT Network Total Health gt __ Security 1GB gt Eq Wireless Networks gt Access Points H sri homeaP 2 4GHz Clients Top Talkers Top Access Points PDT CUENTS 00 00 3B E9 90 2B 00 00 3B E9 9D 2A 00 00 38 E9 9D 28 5 00 00 3B E9 9D 29 00 00 3B E9 9D 26 00 00 3B E9 9D 25 e Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday 00 00 35 E9 9D 27 The page displays a graph for the total number of clients and amount of traffic at the location a table with the top talkers clients at the location and a graph for the top access points at the location The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days and the information in the upper graph for the WiFi traffic for all networks at the location 7 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 70s You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days 8 To customize the information
107. IUS TKIP or TKIP AES RADIUS server WPA2 with RADIUS RADIUS AES or TKIP AES RADIUS server WPA and WPA2 with RADIUS RADIUS TKIP AES RADIUS server Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 16 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Plan the Hotspots with Free and Paid For Access Plan the hotspots that you want to offer at a location Hotspots can offer free access paid for access that is administered through cloud AAA paid for access with vouchers and paid for access with vouchers with additional limited free access The application supports the following authentication and payment methods for hotspots e Click through No authentication and no email address is required to click through to a free hotspot e Click through with email No authentication is required but an email address is required to click through to a free hotspot e Cloud AAA User name and password are required to sign in to a paid for hotspot For each user you must set up a hotspot user account with a user name and password ina user group You grant that user group access to the paid for hotspot e Vouchers Voucher number is required to sign in to a paid for hotspot In addition to paid for access you can also offer additional limited free access with the voucher Note Although a less common approach you could also use the voucher option to generate user names and passwords for guest use in an office environment or as a ligh
108. If you work with a trial license go to Step 16 If you work with a permanent license do the following a Make sure that you own sufficient licenses to support the new access points The following figure shows the licensing information in a situation in which you do not own sufficient licenses to support the new access point Add Multiple APs Upload Confirm amp Edit Licensing Click Add to import these 12 access points if they are powered on and have an intemet connection they will connect to the Cloud in a few moments No Name Serial No Charm 23340A5W003D5 Strange 25670A5KL03A3 Top 34056A5Y7Y311 Flute 41756C5K8Y352 MAR 2 Ae 1 4 TOKENS WARNING Add license keys before connecting these access points to the internet b If you do not own sufficient licenses do one of the following e Add the access points anyway see Step 16 The application lets you add the access points but you cannot manage them with the application until you add a license with a sufficient number of tokens Each Manage Access Points at a Location 97 Business Central Wireless Manager Application token provides one access point with one month of cloud usage For more information see View Licenses or Add a License to an Account with a Paid For Subscription on page 276 e Remove some access points from the list by clicking the associated X icons e Cancel the operation by clicking the CANCEL button 16 Click the ADD button A
109. LA By default the On radio button is selected and the user can click the Terms and Conditions link on the splash page to view the default EULA You can change the text of the EULA You can select the Off radio button in which case the EULA is not accessible to the user on the splash page 11 To preview the splash page click the PREVIEW button in the upper right of the Image section 12 To change your customization of the splash page and start again click the RESET button 13 To add the captive portal profile click the ADD WITH BASIC MODE button The Captive Portal Profile page displays the profile Note For information about how to assign a captive portal profile to a hotspot for a location or WiFi network see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 121 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers An advanced captive portal profile for voucher access lets you customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file the application supports CSS page styling including customized advanced login messages and a custom end user license agreement EULA In addition to access that is paid for with a voucher you can also provide limited free access Note The default splash page for an advanced captive portal profile is responsive to tablet and smartphone displays For
110. Limits Optional No Policy Voucher Unit Cost s 0 Per connected Dg Hour Optional Free Access No Optional Access 7 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Profile Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal Redirect users to a specified website after login Voucher Access Settings Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Voucher Plan Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the voucher plan Usage Limits Optional Voucher Unit Cost From the menu select a usage plan By default the selection from the menu is No Policy For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Enter an amount in US The selections from the menus are fixed at connected and Hour The amount that you enter is the cost per hour of connection Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 123 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Optional Free Access By default a voucher does not offer free WiFi access and the selection from the menu is No Optional Access To offer a limited period of free WiFi access with a voucher that is in addition to the period purchased with the voucher select one of the following op
111. NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager Application User Manual N ETG EAR Welcome Business Central 7 Vi Monitoring Summary I d Like to urrent Network Health Network Traffic Summary Add Location 252 330 596 Add Access Point Users connected now Users over 24 hours MB usage over 24 hours Invite User Average clients per Access Point over 24 hours Networks Map View Active Alarms a aes SOUTH Ge AANE y ane e A po M DAKOTA 24 Critical 2 Major 0 Waming IDAHO N WYOMING T ee af __NEBRASKA Firmware upgrade failed 4 A NEVADA urate United States UTAH COLORADO i kansas Rogue AP Detected e aS LA RARA i CALIFORNIA Bere saceae Vagas if OKLAHON Los Angeles ARIZONA i 5 INS gt Google Mexico View active alarms Sgil Map data 2015 Google INEGI Terms of Use NETGEAR Inc All rights reserved ia aoon September 2015 202 11548 02 350 East Plumeria Drive San Jose CA 95134 USA Business Central Wireless Manager Application Support Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product You can visit www netgear com support to register your product get help access the latest downloads and user manuals and join our community We recommend that you use only official NETGEAR support resources Trademarks NETGEAR Inc NETGEAR and the NETGEAR Logo are trademarks of NETGEAR Inc Any non NETGEAR trademarks are used for reference purposes only Revision History
112. Network Add Wireless Network Enter details for the new wireless network that you would like to make available at this location Please note that you can configure advanced authentication types including WPA with RADIUS by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Network Name NETGEAR_11ng Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and 5GHz Network Authentication WPAMWPA2 PSK Data Encryption TKIP AES Network Key Y Show Characters Configure the network settings a In the Network Name field enter a WiFi network name SSID b From the Wireless Network on menu select the WiFi band or bands For dual band access points you can select both bands to be active c From the Network Authentication menu select the type of authentication If you need advanced authentication select one of the available options from the Network Authentication menu and complete the procedure Then configure the Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 67 Business Central Wireless Manager Application advanced authentication see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 d From the Data Encryption menu select the type of encryption e In the Network Key field enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters 8 Click the ADD THIS WIRELESS NETWORK button The Network Name and Authentication section displays showing the settings for the new WiFi network Man
113. PM 05 04 2015 PDT 08 59 34PM 05 04 2015 PDT The page displays details about the access point settings and LAN statistics and WiFi statistics for the access point The details are self explanatory 9 To view the WIRELESS STATISTICS section move the slider at the right to the bottom 10 To change the refresh rate for the details in the ACCESS POINT SETTINGS section move the switch to 30 Seconds By default the refresh rate is 10 minutes Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 231 View and Manage Alarms and 1 1 Events You can view and manage current and previous alarms using various filter options In addition you can view and manage network event notifications If your network includes a syslog server you can configure an access point to send its logs to the server see Manage the Syslog Settings for an Access Point on page 92 This chapter includes the following sections Alarm and Event Concepts and Examples e Account Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for Your Account e Location Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for a Location e WiFi Network Level View the Event Log for a WiFi Network e Access Point Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for an Access Point Note The alarm and event tables that you can display in the application can show a maximum of 200 entries However for all alarm and event tables you can download the entire table with all entries even if mor
114. Point Profile page displays To change the access point name in the Name field enter a new name for the access point To configure a static IP address or the VLAN settings scroll down and click the IP Settings heading The IP and VLAN settings display Change the IP or VLAN settings as needed For more information see the following sections e Configure a Static IP Address for an Access Point on page 86 e Specify the Management VLAN Settings for an Access Point on page 88 To manage the antenna settings configure a static channel configure static output power or manage the syslog settings scroll down and click the Advanced heading The advanced settings display Change the antenna channel output power or syslog settings as needed For more information see the following sections e Manage the Access Point Antenna Settings on page 89 e Configure a Static Channel for an Access Point on page 90 e Configure Static Output Power for an Access Point on page 91 e Manage the Syslog Settings for an Access Point on page 92 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 50 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the Name and Dimensions of a Floor You can change the name and dimensions of a floor Once you assign a floor to a building you cannot change the building assignment However you can
115. Save your password and store it in a safe place 4 In the INFOMATION section enter your personal information 5 To view the terms and conditions do the following a Click the Terms and Conditions link A pop up window displays the terms and conditions b Click the AGREE button The pop up window closes 6 Click the Sign Up button A message on the page informs you if the sign up is successful If the sign up is successful you receive a confirmation email 7 Open the NETGEAR Account Confirmation email and click the here link Note The entire sentence is Click here to activate your account and log in The New Account Activation page displays 8 Enter your password 9 Click the ACTIVATE button The application login page displays Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 180 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Sell and Generate a Voucher You can sell and generate email and print vouchers for any location for which an admin user configured at least one hotspot Locations for which no hotspots are configured do not display gt To sell and print a voucher for a hotspot 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button By default Voucher printing is selected and the All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS t
116. Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Usage Plan The All Usage Plans page lists all usage plans Select the usage plan The Usage Plan page displays Change the settings as needed For more information about the settings see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 129 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 8 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a Usage Plan You can remove a usage plan that you no longer need If the usage plan is in use you cannot remove it In such a situation you must find the captive portals hotspots user groups and user accounts to which the usage plan is assigned and disassociate the usage plan from that component A usage plan can be assigned to more than one component Once it is disassociated you can remove the usage plan To remove a usage plan 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Usage Plan The All Usage Plans page lists all usage plans 6 Select the usage plan 7 From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Usage Plan T
117. Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right ss 7 0a You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the neighbor access points table as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Details link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 216 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table 15 To mark one or more access points do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the access points or to select all access points select the check box in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Mark as Known or Mark as Unknown Your s
118. Setting Description Create New Policy Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan Limit access to Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Manage Hotspots for Locations 163 Setting Business Central Wireless Manager Application Description Permitted access hours Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Copy From Existing Based on Policy Name From the menu select the existing shared usage plan on which you want to base the hotspot usage plan Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan Limit access to Permitted access hours Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Use Existing Use From the menu select the existing shared usage plan that you want to use as the hotspot usage plan 20 Click the ADD THIS HOTSPOT button The Network Name and Authentication section displays showing the settings for the new hotspot By default the network authentication is configured as an open system and the hotspot does not provide data encryption For information a
119. Step 10 and in which you can set usage limits for both voucher access and free access Multiple combinations are possible Note If you do not assign a usage plan to the hotspot Internet access for a voucher user is terminated automatically after 48 hours of usage 12 Take one of the actions that are described in the following table Action Voucher limits Set usage limits for voucher access You did not select free access in No free access Step 10 1 Select the Yes radio button 2 Goto Step 13 3 In the Voucher Plan section specify the usage plans for voucher access Manage Hotspots for Locations 175 Action Business Central Wireless Manager Application Details Voucher limits Free access with limits No voucher limits Free access with limits Set usage limits for voucher access You selected free access in Step 10 and must set usage limits for free access 1 Select the Yes radio button 2 Go to Step 13 3 In the Voucher Plan section specify the usage plan for voucher access 4 Inthe Usage Limits for Free Access section specify the usage plan for free access Do not set usage limits for voucher access You selected free access in Step 10 and must set usage limits for free access 1 Leave the No radio button selected which is the default setting 2 Go to Step 13 3 In the Usage Limits for Free Access section specify the usage plan for free access No voucher limits No fr
120. Time Since Power Up 0d 0h 2m Alarms Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 Cloud Managed Access Points 279 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The application can indicate any of the following cloud states for an access point Waiting for connection The access point is not yet cloud managed and is waiting for a connection to the application Connected The access point is cloud managed and is connected to the application Disconnected The access point was cloud managed but is disconnected from the application Upgrading firmware The access point is either cloud managed or is in the process of becoming cloud managed while the application is pushing a firmware upgrade Rebooting after upgrading firmware The access point is either cloud managed or in the process of becoming cloud managed and is rebooting after the application pushed a firmware upgrade Configuring The access point is in the process of becoming cloud managed while the application is pushing the initial configuration to the access point Rebooting after configuring The access point is in the process of becoming cloud managed and is rebooting after the application pushed the initial configuration to the access point Rebooting manually The access point is cloud managed and someone is rebooting the access point manually View the Cloud Conn
121. User Activity Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details al By default no data is shown on the page The previous figure shows the period over which a search occurs as Last 7 Days To select another search period click the clock icon at the right ts 7 oays You can select a search period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days In the Hotspot usage details field enter all or part of a client MAC address email address user name or voucher ID What you can enter as search criteria depends on the type of WiFi network that you set up for the hotspot see the introduction of this section Click the magnifier icon Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v a Hotspot usage details DD al Search Result No Identifier SSID Location Authentication Typ DD1E15D6 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort Voucher The previous figure shows part of a voucher ID in the Hotspot usage details field which yields a single hotspot user with a voucher ID that starts with the specified search criterium A search could yield several hotspot users To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous image Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 212 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 12 To sort the table click a table header 13 To view more details about one individual hotspot user do the following a Cl
122. When you assign the access point to a location the password for the access point changes from the password for unassigned access points to the location specific password that you specified when you added the location Manage Access Point Settings The settings for an access point apply only to one specific access point at a location The following sections describe the settings for an access point at a location Change the Access Point Name Configure a Static IP Address for an Access Point Specify the Management VLAN Settings for an Access Point Manage the Access Point Antenna Settings Configure a Static Channel for an Access Point Configure Static Output Power for an Access Point Manage the Syslog Settings for an Access Point Change the Access Point Name You do not need to use the NETGEAR default name for an access point and can change the name to a custom name Note As part of an access point profile besides the access point name the only other settings that you can change are the location building and floor to which the access point is assigned For more information see Assign an Access Point to a Location on page 84 Manage Access Points at a Location 85 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To change the name of an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and
123. Wireless Manager Application Click the network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section displays Take one of the following actions e To disable the WiFi network select the Disable radio button e To reenable the WiFi network select the Enable radio button Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Remove a WiFi Network from a Location You can remove a WiFi network that you no longer need gt Toremove a WiFi network from a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display Click the network On the main page the Network Name and Authenti
124. access point Access Point Profile Name netgear137EE8 Serial Number 29210A5WO000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F 7 17 7E E7 Location Time Since Power Up 04 9h 48m Alarms ao Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the application detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting for connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the access point push the configuration to the access point and automatically reboot the access point again Because you did not yet assign the access point to a location the Location menu displays Unassigned As a security measure the application automatically assigns a password to the unassigned access points see View or Change the Password for Unassigned Access Points on page 99
125. account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point Scroll down and click the Advanced heading The advanced settings displays From the Antenna menu select External The default setting is Internal Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage Access Points at a Location 89 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Configure a Static Channel for an Access Point By default cloud managed access points autoconfigure their channels that is the channel setting is Auto However for each WiFi band that the access point supports you can configur
126. address Paid access A basic hotspot that provides paid access through voucher authentication Advanced hotspot An advanced hotspot lets you customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file the application supports CSS page styling including customized advanced login messages and a custom EULA You can assign click through click through with email or voucher authentication through two types of advanced hotspots Free access An advanced hotspot that provides free access by requiring users to click through or click through using an email address Paid access An advanced hotspot that provides paid access through voucher authentication You can base a hotspot on an existing captive portal profile see Manage Captive Portal Profiles on page 109 and usage plan see Manage Usage Plans on page 127 or you can build an entirely new hotspot Manage Hotspots for Locations 151 Business Central Wireless Manager Application If you use the hotspot wizards that are described in this chapter you can offer free access or access that is paid for through vouchers with or without an additional limited period of free access Hotspot Options The following table describes the many options that are available to you when you set up a hotspot for a location Table 4 Hotspot options Feature Hotspot Free Access Hotspot Voucher Access Authentication New captive portal Click through Vouche
127. address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays From the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select User Groups The All User Groups page displays Click the user group The User Group page displays Select the check box for the user account Click the EDIT SELECTED button The EDIT SELECTED USER pop up window displays Change the settings as needed For more information about the settings see Add a New Hotspot User Account to a User Group on page 137 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 140 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Remove One or More Hotspot User Account from a User Group You can remove one or more hotspot user accounts that you no longer need You must know to which user group the hotspot user accounts are assigned Note Hotspot user accounts that you remove from a user group are not automatically removed from the hotspot user database For information about removing a hotspot user account from the hotspot user database see Remove a Hotspot User Account on page 134 Tip If you are not sure to which user group the hotspot user account is assigned locate the hotspot user account in the hotspot user database see View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account on page 131 gt To remove hotspot use
128. again To view more of the Date PDT column move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the event log as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Event Log link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header View and Manage Alarms and Events 247 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table Access Point Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for an Access Point You can view the active alarms for an access point acknowledge the alarms and clear the alarms You can also view the cleared alarms and event log for an access point The following sections describe how you view and manage alarms and events for an access point View and Manage Active Alarms for an Access Point e View the Cleared Alarms for an Access Point e View the Event Log for an Access Point View and Manage Active Alarms for an Access Point You can view the active alarm
129. age multiple features For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 5 Manage Access Points at a Location You can configure and manage the following features Manage the profile including assignment or reassignment of the location building and floor for the access point Manage the DHCP server static IP addresses and VLANs for the access point Manage advanced settings such as the antenna assignment static channels static output Tx power and syslog server settings for the access point Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 12 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Shared Setting Functions You can configure and manage the following features shared settings independently of a location and then assign them to any location For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 6 Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles and Chapter 7 Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access You can configure and manage the following features e Setup radio on off schedules e Setup captive portal profiles e Setup RADIUS server profiles e Define usage plans e Specify user groups e Specify hotspot users e Setup MAC ACLs Monitoring Functions Monitoring lets you display WiFi network and access point health WiFi network and access point usage WiFi network location maps alarms and alarm trends statistics for networks access points traffic clients and ne
130. age plan settings and splash page settings To change a captive portal profile 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Captive Portal Profiles The Captive Portal Profiles page lists all captive portal profiles Select the captive portal profile Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 125 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The nature of the page that displays depends on whether the captive portal profile is for free access cloud AAA access or voucher access The following figure show a page for a captive portal profile with voucher access 7 Change the profile settings and if applicable voucher settings as needed For more information about these settings see one of the following sections CUSTOMIZE Profile Name Short Time Use Authentication Vouchers Client separation will be enabled on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login Voucher Access Settings Voucher Plan Name Regular Usage Limits Optional No Policy Voucher Unit Cost g 25 Per connected A Hour Optional Free Access No Optional Access Profile for free access See the tab
131. age the WiFi Settings for a Network The WiFi settings for a network apply only to one specific network at a location The following sections describe the WiFi settings for a network at a location Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption Change SSID Broadcast and Client Separation Change the WiFi Network VLAN Settings Change the WiFi Network Radio Band Change the WiFi Network into a Captive Portal by Assigning a Captive Portal Profile Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption By default the network authentication is mixed WPA WPA2 PS and the data encryption is TKIP AES These default settings apply to any network that you set up at a location Before you change the network authentication you might need to take the following actions Set up a RADIUS configuration If you want to change the default network authentication to a type of authentication with RADIUS first do the following 1 Setup a RADIUS server profile see Add a RADIUS Server Profile with an Optional Accounting Server on page 105 2 Select the RADIUS server profile for the location at which the network is configured see Select a RADIUS Server for a Location on page 63 Set up a MAC ACL configuration If you want to configure MAC ACL enforcement as an additional authentication method to allow only devices whose MAC address is on a local or external ACL to access the network first do the following 1 Set up a MAC ACL see S
132. ager Application network to a location For more information see Add a New WiFi Network to a Location on page 67 Access Point wizard Lets you add an access point and as an option lets you assign the access point to a location For more information see Add an Access Point and Assign It to a Building and Floor on page 80 Wizard to add multiple access points Lets you upload a file with access points that is serial numbers and names edit and confirm the access points and if you run the application with a permanent license apply licenses to the access points For more information see Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously on page 94 Captive portal wizard Lets you add and customize a captive portal profile For more information see Manage Captive Portal Profiles on page 109 Hotspot wizard Lets you add a hotspot set a usage plan edit the splash page and set access limits For more information see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Wizard to import MAC addresses Lets you upload a file with MAC addresses and import the addresses into a MAC ACL For more information see Set Up a MAC ACL by Importing a File with MAC Addresses on page 145 Application Roles The application supports the following roles for users who can log in to the application These users are different from WiFi users and hotspot users who can connect to a network that is part of the cloud but who cannot log in to the application Owner A user
133. ainResort Tahoe City United States Add Usage Plan gt SunnyMountainResort Add Radius Server Profile Add User Group Add MAC ACL 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Location Get Started With Cloud Management 29 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Location Location Name Country United States Zip Code Street Address Time Zone AP Local Password 6 Specify a location name complete the location address fields select a time zone and set the location specific password for the access points that you can assign to the location Note Entering correct address information allows the location to be displayed on Google Maps Note The password that you must set in this step is the password that you need when you want to access the web management interface of an individual cloud managed access point or to access a cloud managed access point over an SSH connection 7 Click the ADD THIS LOCATION button The application confirms the addition 8 Click the Add Wireless Network link Add Wireless Network Enter details for the new wireless network that you would like to make available at this location Please note that you can configure advanced authentication types including WPA with RADIUS by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Network Name NETGEAR_11ng Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and 5GHz Network Authentication WPA WPA2 PSK Data Encryp
134. al 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FS FS PS ao no fF WH CO MAC Address 00 00 64 95 B1 30 00 00 64 95 81 32 00 00 64 95 B1 29 00 00 64 95 81 25 00 00 64 95 B1 27 00 00 64 95 81 2E 00 00 64 95 81 2C 00 00 64 95 B1 20 00 00 64 95 81 21 00 00 64 95 B1 22 00 00 64 95 81 31 00 00 64 95 B1 2B 00 00 64 95 81 2A 00 00 64 95 B1 26 00 00 64 95 B1 24 00 00 64 95 B1 2F Last Seen Access Point Name VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 When PDT 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 01PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 11 22 08PM 05 0 Duration 00 7h 36m 0 7h 36m 0d 7h 36m 0d 7h 36m 0d 7h 36m 0d 7h 36m 0d 7h 36m 0d 7h 38m 0d 6h 6m 0d 7h 36m 0 7h 36m 0 7h 36m 0 7h 36m 0 7h 36m 04 7h 36m 0 7h 36m Business Central Wireless Manager Application Channel The page displays a table with the clients that are currently connected to the WiFi network The columns in the table are self explanatory 9 To select which columns are shown in the table do the following
135. al Password The default value for this Account s AP Local Password can be changed under Account Settings Get Started With Cloud Management 35 Business Central Wireless Manager Application b In the Name field enter a name for the access point In the Serial Number field enter the precise serial number for the access point Note Without entering the correct serial number you cannot add the access point to the network d Click the ADD THIS ACCESS POINT button The Location Profile page displays showing information about the new location e Repeat Step 9 through Step 76 until you add all floors and access points that you need for the building 17 To verify the configuration of the new location with its buildings floors and access points do the following a In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location that you just added The Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display Note In this procedure you did not yet set up any WiFi networks for the building so none display under the Wireless Network heading In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings that you just added display In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of a building that you added The floors that you just added to the building display In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of a floor that you added If you added an access point to the floor the access point displays If you added an access point In th
136. al blocks clients from accessing the network until they are verified You can require users to agree to user terms and you can direct user to a specific website You can offer free access or access that is paid or through vouchers The application provides four methods of entry for a captive portal click through click through with email cloud AAA authentication and voucher authentication You can set up two types of captive portal profiles each of which can offer free or paid access e Basic captive portal profile A basic captive portal profile lets you use the default splash page image or upload a custom image align the image and customize the header text and end user license agreement EULA You can assign click through click through using an email address cloud AAA authentication or voucher authentication through two types of basic captive portal profiles Free access A basic captive portal profile that provides free access by requiring users to click through or click through using an email address Paid access A basic captive portal profile that provides paid access through cloud AAA authentication or voucher authentication e Advanced captive portal profile An advanced captive portal profile lets you customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file the application supports CSS page styling including customized advanced login messages and a custom EULA You can assign click through click through
137. an either create a new profile copy from an existing profile or use existing profile Captive Portal Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Captive Portal Profile Authentication Vouchers Client separation will be enable on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login Voucher Access Settings Voucher Plan Name Voucher Unit Cost 9 Select a radio button to specify which type of captive portal must be used for the hotspot You can create a new captive portal copy and customize an existing captive portal or use an existing captive portal 10 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Create New Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication The selection from the menu is fixed at Vouchers Redirect users to a Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Voucher Plan Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the voucher plan Voucher Unit Cost Enter an amount in US The selections from the menus are fixed at connected and Hour The amount that you enter is the cost per hour of connection Optional Free Access By default a voucher does not offer free WiFi access and the selection from the menu is No Optional Access To offer a limited period of fr
138. anage Alarms and Events 238 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms EventLog Hotspot Users v Download Full Event Log No a Auto RF Successful Warning 12 05 09AM 05705 0 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 02 59AM 05 05 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 03 14AM 05 04 Auto RF Successful Warning 11 58 44PM 05 03 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 03 38AM 05 03 Auto RF Successful Warning 11 58 18PM 05 02 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 03 10AM 05 02 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 00 31AM 05 02 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 05 24AM 05 01 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 00 14AM 05 01 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 02 50AM 04 30 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 00 14AM 04 30 Title Source Severity Date PDT Location location2 Location si homeAP Location sri homeAP Location location2 Location location2 Location sri homeAP Location sri homeAP Location location2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Location location2 Location si homeAP Location sri homeAP Location location2 10 11 12 Notification message Notification message Notification message VW712 35 8731C8 VW712 35 8731C8 VW712 35 8731C8 Critical Critical Critical 05 15 55PM 04 29 05 15 55PM 04 29 05 15 52PM 04 29 The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the events as Last 30 Days To select a
139. another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 25 You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days or you can select to display all entries in the active alarms database 8 To see details about an alarm do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the alarm or click any field in any column for the alarm except for a field in the Source column For more information about the fields in the Source column see Step 74 b To close the alarm details click the triangle or field again 9 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right View and Manage Alarms and Events 235 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 10 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom 11 To sort the table click a table header 12 To download the alarms as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Active Alarms link and follow the directions of your browser 13 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table 14 To v
140. are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons Q m below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point Scroll down and click the Advanced heading The advanced settings displays In the Syslog Settings section configure the syslog server a Select the Enable Syslog check box The Server IP Address and Port Number fields become available b Enter the IP address of the syslog server Enter the port number through which the application can reach the syslog server The default port number is 514 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage Access Points at a Location 92 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Reboot an Access Point You can reboot an individual access point gt To reboot an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer
141. arted wizard to set up at least one location and WiFi network Setting up an access point during the Get Started wizard process is optional because you can also do that later If you prefer you can add multiple access points to the application inventory before you initiate the Get Started wizard For information about adding multiple access points to the application inventory see Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously on page 94 If you already set up a location and WiFi network the Get Started wizard no longer displays Instead see Set Up a Basic Location on page 29 Get Started With Cloud Management 23 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To add anew location network and access point for the first time using the Get Started wizard 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button a oen T momor eren o Monitoring Summary You have not added any locations Except for adding access points to the application inventory and making changes to your account no configuration options other than initiating the Get Started wizard are available to you You must set up a location before you can configure and monitor networks and access points 4 Click the GET STARTED button The Get Started page displays This page provides information only
142. at is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table To view more information about the access point that is the source of the alarm click a field in the Source column The summary page for the access point displays For more information see View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point on page 226 View the Event Log for Your Account You can view the event log for your account The application can display a maximum of 200 events but you can download the entire event log as an Excel or csv file A downloaded log includes debug level events that are not displayed onscreen Except for debug events events are automatically cleared after 30 days Debug events are automatically cleared after 7 days To view and download the event log for your account 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays Select Event Log View and M
143. at you want to be shown The table adjusts A pop up window displays can select to display all entries in the cleared alarms database To see details about an alarm do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the alarm or click any field in any column for the alarm except for a field in the Source column b To close the alarm details click the triangle or field again To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the alarms as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Cleared Alarms link and follow the directions of your browser View and Manage Alarms and Events 252 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 15 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table View the Event Log for an Access Point You can view the event log for an access point The application can display a maximum of 200 events but you can download the entire event log as an Excel or csv file A downloaded log includes debug level events
144. ays 8 To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a Right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts 9 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 25 You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days or you can select to display all entries in the active alarms database 10 To see details about an alarm do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the alarm or click any field in any column for the alarm except for field in the Source column For more information about the fields in the Source column see Step 76 b To close the alarm details click the triangle or field again 11 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right View and Manage Alarms and Events 241 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 12 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom 13 To sort the table click a table header 14 To download the alarms as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Active Alarms link and follow the directions of your browser 15 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table
145. bout how to change the network authentication data encryption and other network settings for the hotspot see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 Add a Basic Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher You set up a hotspot by adding it to a location A basic hotspot with voucher access lets you use the default splash page image or upload a custom image align the image and customize the header text and end user license agreement EULA For a basic hotspot you cannot customize or restyle the splash page A voucher is used for authentication For information about setting up an advanced hotspot with voucher access see Add an Advanced Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher on page 172 When you set up a basic hotspot with paid voucher access you can also select to provide limited free access in addition to the paid access For example you could provide free access for the first hour and then require paid access for any additional hours Manage Hotspots for Locations 164 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To add a basic hotspot with voucher and optional limited free WiFi access to a location or individual WiFi network i 2 7 8 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Note You can click
146. by sending invitations to others change the application of existing application users and remove application users from the user pool Invitees do not become application users until they accept the invitation sign up for an user account and activate the user account Note All user capabilities of an admin user are also included in the user capabilities of the owner who is the user who signed up for the application account and owns the account Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 264 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Invite Others to Become Admin Read Only or Hotspot Clerk Application Users As admin user the owner is also an admin user of the application you can send invitations to invite others to become admin read only or hotspot clerk users Note As an admin user you can set up a hotspot and define vouchers see Add a Basic Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher on page 164 However only someone with a hotspot clerk user account can manage vouchers see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations lf you log in with an admin or read only user account you cannot sell and print vouchers and you cannot view the status of sold vouchers To invite someone to become an admin ready only or hotspot clerk application user 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and pass
147. cation can manage an access point the access point must run the required firmware version that is cloud enabled This release supports the following NETGEAR wireless access points running cloud enabled firmware version 3 0 0 7 or later e WNAP210v2 ProSAFE Wireless N Access Point e WNAP320 ProSAFE Wireless N Access Point e WNDAP350 ProSAFE Dual Band Wireless N Access Point e WNDAPS360 ProSAFE Dual Band Wireless N Access Point e WNDAP660 ProSAFE Dual Band Wireless N Access Point The following table lists the minimum required standalone firmware version that an access point must run in order for you to be able to upgrade the access point to the required cloud enabled firmware version Table 2 Software requirements for upgrade to the cloud enabled firmware version Access Point Model Minimum Required Required Cloud Enabled Standalone Firmware Firmware WNAP210v2 ProSAFE Wireless N Access Point v2 1 4 8 v3 0 0 7 or later WNAP320 ProSAFE Wireless N Access Point v2 1 6 v3 0 0 7 or later WNDAP350 ProSAFE Dual Band Wireless N Access Point v2 1 9 v3 0 0 7 or later WNDAP360 ProSAFE Dual Band Wireless N Access Point V2 1 12 v3 0 0 7 or later WNDAP660 ProSAFE Dual Band Wireless N Access Point V2 0 5 v3 0 0 7 or later If your access point runs a standalone firmware version that is earlier than the minimum required standalone firmware version you first must upgrade the access point to the minimum required standalone fi
148. cation section displays From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Network A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The WiFi network is removed from the location The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 78 Manage Access Points at a Location You assign access points to a location Therefore you first must set up a location and then you can assign access points to that location For each access point you can manage the settings such as the IP address VLANs antenna static channel and static output power This chapter includes the following sections Add an Access Point and Assign It to a Building and Floor Add an Access Point Without Assigning It to a Location Assign an Access Point to a Location Manage Access Point Settings Reboot an Access Point Remove an Access Point from Your Account Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously View or Change the Password for Unassigned Access Points Note For information about access point modes see Appendix A Cloud Managed Access Points 79 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add an Access Point and Assign It to a Building and Floor Before you add the access point to a location make sure that your ac
149. cation that you are using for the hotspot 14 To upload a custom template or CSS file to the application click the UPLOAD FILE button and follow the directions of your browser If you upload a CSS file the name of the file is stated in the CSS section 15 To view a custom login message custom error message custom success message or custom EULA click the associated PREVIEW button in the HTML section 16 Click the NEXT button The page adjusts and provides you with the options to set usage limits If you do not want to set usage limits leave the No radio button selected which is the default setting and go to Step 20 17 To set usage limits select the Yes radio button Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Set Access Edit Splash Set Usage Network Policy Page Plans Set Usage Plans Set usage limits for your hotspot by choosing time and login limits You can either create a new usage usage plan copy from an existing usage plan and use existing usage plan Configure usage limits for this hotspot Yes No Usage Plan Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Policy Name Limit access to Hours per Month Permitted access hours 12 00 AM to 12 00 AM 18 Select a radio button to specify how you want to set up the usage limits for the hotspot You can create a new usage plan copy and customize an existing usage plan or use an existing usage plan 19 Configure the settings as described in the following table
150. ccess points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage RF Assignment and Output Power for a Location For all cloud managed access points at a location you can schedule automatic radio frequency auto RF assignment run RF assignment manually and select which channels participate in RF assignment The capability to select channels for RF assignment at the location level affects only which channels participate in RF assignment whether RF assignment runs automatically or you run RF assignment manually However on an individual cloud managed access point you can configure a static channel see Configure a Static Channel for an Access Point on page 90 For all cloud managed access points at a location you can also schedule automatic output Tx power adjustment for each radio band run Tx power level adjustment manually and set the maximum power level for Tx power adjustment Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 58 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The capability to select the maximum power level at the location level affects only the Tx power adjustment However for an individual cloud managed access point you can configure static output power see Configure Static Output Power for an Access Point on page 91 The static channel and static output power that you configure on an individua
151. censes or Add a License to an Account with a Paid For Subscription 276 Appendix A Cloud Managed Access Points View the Access Point Cloud State in the Application 279 View the Cloud Connection and Activity Status on a Cloud Enabled Access Point 0 ccc ccc eee eect eee e nee eeee 280 Convert an Access Point from Cloud Enabled Mode to Standalone WOE Ge x siz ee 5 9 w 5 9 0 Gin g enera eaer sa ees 282 Appendix B Technical Specifications Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager This chapter provides an introduction to the NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager BCWM application For information about preparing your access points for cloud management and subscribing to the BCWM application see the NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager Quick Start Guide which you can download from downloadcenter netgear com This chapter includes the following sections Business Central Wireless Manager Application Concepts Key Functions Wizards for Ease of Configuration Application Roles Plan a Location with WiFi Networks and Hotspots Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access Points Definitions of Access Point Terms Note For more information about the topics covered in this manual visit the support website at support netgear com Note This manual uses the following conventions WiFi and wireless are exchangeable terms A WiFi network provides access without a captive portal A hot
152. cess point and automatically reboot the access point again g If you added an access point To view other details about the access point on the main page click another section heading for example IP Setting For information about how to change the access point settings see Manage Access Point Settings on page 85 h Repeat Step d through Step g for each floor and access point that you added 18 In the LOCATIONS tree click the location The Location Profile page displays 19 From the Choose Action menu select Add Wireless Network Get Started With Cloud Management 37 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Wireless Network Enter details for the new wireless network that you would like to make available at this location Please note that you can configure advanced authentication types including WPA with RADIUS by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Network Name NETGEAR_11ng Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and SGHz Network Authentication WPAMWPA2 PSK Data Encryption TKIP AES Network Key v Show Characters 20 Configure the network settings a b In the Network Name field enter a WiFi network name SSID From the Wireless Network on menu select the WiFi band or bands For dual band access points you can select both bands to be active From the Network Authentication menu select the type of authentication If you need advanced authentication sel
153. cess point runs the required firmware see Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access Points on page 19 that you reset it to factory defaults and that you power cycle it gt To add an access point and assign it to a building and floor 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory If you already added access points the access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name Note Ifyou did not yet add any access points the ADD ACCESS POINT button displays This button serves the same function as the Add Access Point selection from the Choose Action menu see the next step From the Choose Action menu select Add Access Point Add ei Point e your Access Point in order to avoid w aog for it to establish connection with t cloud management platfo m set to the AP Local Passw ord for the Locatio is assig igned If it is not assigned Location the AP Local passwo e set to the Account s Default AP Le ocal Password The default value e for this Account s AP pe Password can be changed und unt Settings In the Name field enter a name for the access point In the Serial Number field enter the precise serial number for the access point Note Without entering the correct serial n
154. check box to enable all channels to participate c To prevent channels from participating in RF assignment clear the associated check boxes 10 To disable auto RF assignment entirely in the Channel Allocation section for the 2 4 GHz band 5 GHz band or both bands click the Auto Channel Off radio button Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 60 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To configure the default output power manually in the Tx power settings section move the 2 4 GHz Default TX Power slider 5 GHz Default TX Power slider or both sliders to the desired output power level You can set the Tx power level to 1 full power which is the default setting 1 2 1 4 1 8 or 0 which effectively shuts down Tx power on a radio band To disable automatic Tx power adjustment entirely in the Tx power settings section select the 2 4 GHz Auto Tx Power Off radio button 5 GHz Auto Tx Power Off radio button or both radio buttons Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Assign User Groups to Buildings at a Location For a hotspot that uses cloud AAA authorization you can assign user groups to buildings at a location so that you can specify which u
155. ciated settings as described in the following table Note The content of the page changes if you make another selection from the Network Authentication menu Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 69 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Settings Description WPA WPA2 PSK This type of authentication is the default selection and can authenticate devices that support either WPA or WPA2 Data Encryption The selection from the menu is fixed at TKIP AES Network Key Enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters The default network key is sharedsecret Note To show the characters in the Network Key field select the Show Characters check box Open System An entirely open system does not provide network authentication does not provide data encryption and is not secured As an option an open system can provide WEP data encryption but does not use the WEP network key to provide network authentication Data Encryption Select one of the following options from the menu e None Data encryption is not supported This is the default setting e 64 bit WEP Uses a 10 digit hexadecimal key e 128 bit WEP Uses a 26 digit hexadecimal key e 152 bit WEP Uses a 32 digit hexadecimal key Network Key If you select a WEP option enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters The default network key is sharedsecret Note To show the characters
156. d Note If the hotspot user account was set up automatically when you created a user account in a user group removing the hotspot user account from the hotspot user database also removes the user account from the user group To remove hotspot user accounts 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left scroll down and select Hotspot Users The Hotspot Users page displays Select the check boxes for the user accounts Click the DELETE SELECTED button A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The user accounts are removed Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 134 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots A user group contains hotspot user account for users who can access a hotspot through cloud AAA For example a hotel could host regular guests premium guests VIP guests and so on You could create a user group for each type of guest attach a different usage plan to each user group and add individual hotspot user accounts to each group This approach is much easier and more efficient than setting up a usage plan for each indi
157. d AES Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 71 Settings Business Central Wireless Manager Application Description Network Key Enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters The default network key is sharedsecret Note To show the characters in the Network Key field select the Show Characters check box WPA2 PSK This type of authentication can authenticate only devices that support WPA2 Data Encryption Network Key Select one of the following options from the menu e AES Supports Advanced Encryption Standard AES only This is the default selection TKIP AES Supports both TKIP and Advanced Encryption Standard AES Enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters The default network key is sharedsecret Note To show the characters in the Network Key field select the Show Characters check box 10 To enable MAC ACL security select one of the following options from the MAC ACL 11 Enforcement menu e Local The MAC address of any device that wants to connect to the network must be on the MAC ACL that you selected for the location at which the network is configured e External Radius The MAC address of any device that wants to connect to the network must be on the RADIUS server that you selected for the location at which the network is configured By default MAC ACL security is disabled Click the
158. d AAA on page 114 e Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 117 e Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 122 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Disable or Reenable a WiFi Network at a Location When you set up a WiFi network it is enabled by default You can temporarily disable a WiFi network at a location and reenable it later gt To disable or reenable a WiFi network at a location i 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 77 7 Business Central
159. d on the type of authentication For all these types of captive portals you can customize the text but not the fields and button To preview this splash page click the PREVIEW button e Click Through The splash page shows the default text Please click Continue for free Internet access or your customized text and the Continue button that the user must click Click Through With Email The splash page shows the default text Please enter a valid email address for Internet access or your customized text a field in which the user must enter an email address and the Continue button that the user must click Manage Hotspots for Locations 157 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description EULA By default the On radio button is selected and the user can click the Terms and Conditions link on the splash page to view the default EULA You can change the text of the EULA You can select the Off radio button in which case the EULA is not accessible to the user on the splash page 14 To preview the splash page click the PREVIEW button in the upper right of the Image section 15 To change your customization of the splash page and start again click the RESET button 16 Click the NEXT button The page adjusts and provides you with the options to set usage limits If you do not want to set usage limits leave the No radio button selected which is the default setting and go to Step 20
160. dicate the following cloud connection status and cloud activity status for the access point Cloud connection status Pending The access point is not yet registered with the application and not yet cloud managed but is either waiting to be connected or in the process of being connected to the application If you reset an access point to the factory default state the access point restarts in the Pending state Activated The access point is registered with the application and is cloud managed Cloud activity status Connected The access point is registered with the application cloud managed connected to the Internet and connected to the application Disconnected Although the access point is registered with the application and is cloud managed it is disconnected from the application This situation could occur when a cable is unplugged the Internet connection is down a gateway cannot be reached a DNS name cannot be resolved and so on Convert an Access Point from Cloud Enabled Mode to Standalone Mode You can convert an access point from cloud managed mode to standalone mode Once converted the access point is running the same firmware version that was used for the cloud managed mode is but now in standalone mode without a restricted web management interface gt To convert an access point from cloud managed mode to standalone mode 1 To view the IP address of the access point in the application so that you can access t
161. does not contain any type of formatting To download a template and add multiple access points to the application 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory If you already added access points the access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name Note If you did not yet add any access points the ADD ACCESS POINT button displays This button serves the same function as the Add Access Point selection from the Choose Action menu see the next step From the Choose Action menu select Add Multiple APs The Access Point wizard starts Manage Access Points at a Location 95 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Multiple APs Upload multiple Access Points with a CSV file Not sure how to do that Use the link to download an example below Browse to CSV 7 My table has header Browse Dowload a CSV file template 6 To download a template click the Download a CSV file template and follow the directions of your browser to save the file to your computer 7 If you did not set up your list of serial numbers and names do so now When you are ready continue with the next step 8 If the table of your csv file with access points includes
162. e than 200 entries exist as an Excel or csv file 232 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Alarm and Event Concepts and Examples The application provides three basic levels of alarms e Critical A critical alarm for a condition that could cause a service disruption and that you must address as soon as possible e Major A major alarm for a condition that might affect a service adversely or is cause for a security concern but that is not urgent e Warning An minor alarm for a condition that is not urgent These alarms can be generated for your account an individual location and an individual access point You can view and manage the current alarms that is acknowledge them clear them or do both After you clear alarms you can still view them in the alarm history that is the cleared alarms table The application also provides four basic levels of event notifications critical warning info and debug These event notification can be generated for your account an individual location an individual WiFi network and an individual access point These notifications remain in the event log Note For information about another type of notification the application notification see View Application Notifications on page 270 The following table lists alarms that could be raised Table 5 Alarms Alarm Description IP or VLAN out of sync An IP address or VLAN mismatch occurred betw
163. e DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES button and follow the directions of your browser to save the zip file to a location on your computer You can alter these default templates or use the default templates as examples to create your own templates You must keep indicators that relate to elements such as style input and email in the source file Otherwise the template will not function Manage Hotspots for Locations 177 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The name of the zip file for voucher use depends on whether or not you offer optional free access with a voucher e No free access with voucher cp_template_no_free_access zip e Optional free access with voucher cp_template_free_access zip After you set up a custom template you can upload it to the application making sure that you do not change the zip file name for the type of access that you are using for the hotspot 18 To upload a custom template or CSS file to the application click the UPLOAD FILE button and follow the directions of your browser If you upload a CSS file the name of the file is stated in the CSS section 19 To view a custom login message custom error message custom success message or custom EULA click the associated PREVIEW button in the HTML section 20 Click the ADD THIS HOTSPOT button The Network Name and Authentication section displays showing the settings for the new hotspot By default the network authentication is configured as an ope
164. e Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 Click the Security icon The security summary page for the location displays 7 Select Neighbor Details Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 215 10 11 12 13 14 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary Neighbor Details NEIGHBOR ACCESS POINT Download Full Details MAC Address Type SSID Channel Rate 60 33 4B E5 5D CC Unknown 157 300 00 80 80 1D 00 18 1D Unknown 11 0 00 00 08 41 75 00 60 Unknown 1 0 00 80 80 48 00 9C 0B Unknown 0 00 00 80 00 00 00 FF Unknown 0 00 80 80 12 00 3B 1D Unknown 0 00 80 80 4E 00 4D 42 Unknown 0 00 B8 3E 59 DB F 1 81 Unknown 144 44 00 01 00 80 80 80 Unknown 0 00 80 80 03 00 02 00 Unknown 0 00 60 33 48 E5 5D CB Unknown SimplePresenceNet 144 44 80 80 03 00 DB 2C Unknown 0 00 80 80 04 00 1E D1 Unknown 0 00 80 80 50 00 4F 44 Unknown 0 00 aan 1F 000R1C Un kn oun oan 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 The columns in the NEIGHBOR ACCESS POINT table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the command log as Last 7 Days To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a To the right of the MAC Address column right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b
165. e LOCATIONS tree click the name of the access point On the main page the Access Point Profile section expands If you added an access point Verify that the access point is connected to the cloud Get Started With Cloud Management 36 Business Central Wireless Manager Application v Access Point Profile Name netgearl137EE8 Serial Number 29210A5W000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F7 17 7E 7 Location SunnyMountainResort Building Building 1 Floor Floor 1 Time Since Power Up 0d 0h 2m Alarms GB Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the application detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting for connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the access point push the configuration to the ac
166. e LOG IN button By default Voucher printing is selected and the All Locations page displays 4 Select Voucher status Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 184 Business Central Wireless Manager Application In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location where the hotspot is set up All hotspots at that location display Voucher printing Voucher status SunnyMountainResort GolfCourse 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz All Corporate HotelGuests 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz 9 SunnyMountainRes GolfWeek 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz To display detailed information about each hotspot click the Expand all link Information about access pricing and security displays Click the hotspot for which you want to view the voucher status SunnyMountainResort HotelGuests VOUCHERS No Voucher ID Unit Type Total Unit Quantity Total 40BCBF18 i connected hour 796E608D Active connected hour 205B91FD Expired connected hour D4333995 Expired connected hour 9B6EC7BC Active connected hour DODDBS5DE Active connected hour AFE16CB2 Expired connected hour 65CD86D7 Expired connected hour F732A649 Expired connected hour EB418FBF Expired connected hour 7062686C Expired connected hour F8F69932 Expired connected hour A9953880 Expired connected hour D68B378C Active connected hour D2DD5A93 Expired connected hour oo n ONA WH s io To view more information move the slider at the bottom to the right To reprint a voucher do the fol
167. e a static channel To configure a static channel for an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons Q amp below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point Scroll down and click the Advanced heading The advanced settings displays In the Static Channel section configure a static channel for the 2 4 GHz band 5 GHz band or both e 2 4 GHz band Select the 2 4GHz check box and from the menu that becomes available select a channel e 5 GHz band Select the 5GHz check box and from the
168. e are self explanatory Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 200 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 8 To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a To the right of the Name column right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts 9 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 70a You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days For this table you can also select Right Now to display only the clients that are currently connected 10 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right 11 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom 12 To sort the table click a table header 13 To download the access points table as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Details link and follow the directions of your browser 14 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header View the Command Log for a Location You can view the log of commands that are pending or in progress for access points at the location The command log also includes the commands that were successful failed or
169. e displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays From the Choose Action menu select Add Captive Portal Profile The Captive Portal wizard starts Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 117 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Captive Portal Profile 1 Add Captive Portal Profile Profile Name Authentication Click Through Usage Plan No Policy Client separation will be enabled on this network 7 Redirect users to a specified website after login From the Authentication menu select Vouchers Note For information about the Click Through Click Through With Email and Cloud AAA options see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 111 Add Captive Portal Profile Add Captive Portal Profile Profile Name Authentication Vouchers Client separation will be enabled on this network E Redirect users to a specified website after login Voucher Access Settings Voucher Plan Name Usage Limits Optional No Policy Voucher Unit Cost is 0 Per connected g Hour Optional Free Access No Optional Access Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 118 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 7 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Profile Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal Redirect users to a
170. e floor you can do the following 1 Set up one location for the company 2 Add all access points that the company requires to the location 3 Add all WiFi networks that the company requires to the location You can set up a maximum of 16 WiFi networks for the location e For a company that occupies several floors you can do the following 1 Set up one location for the company 2 Add the number of floors that the company occupies to the location 3 Add all access points that the company requires to the location If the company is spread out over floors that are not adjacent you must set up at least one access point per floor 4 Add all WiFi networks that the company requires to the location If the company is spread out over floors that are not adjacent you must set up at least one WiFi network per floor You can set up a maximum of 16 WiFi networks for each floor of the location Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 18 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e For companies that share a single floor you can do the following 1 Set up one location for the floor 2 Add a sufficient number of access points to the location so that the WiFi requirements for all companies on the floor are covered 3 For each company on the floor add one or more WiFi networks to the location You can set up a maximum of 16 WiFi networks for the location Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access Points Before the appli
171. e information on the page so that you can save the information in a file or email do the following a Click the COPY TO CLIPBOARD button b Save the information as needed c Click the OK button The pop up window closes and the Command Log page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 203 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Location Level Monitor the Usage at a Location You can view the usage summary client usage details and hotspot usage details for a location over a monitoring period that you can customize The following sections describe how you can monitor the usage at a location View the Usage Summary for a Location View Client Details for a Location View Hotspot Usage at a Location Search the Hotspot Database for a Location View the Usage Summary for a Location You can view the usage summary for a location over a monitoring period that you can customize The usage summary includes an overview of the various types of clients and traffic for all networks or a specific network at the location the top talkers clients for all networks at the location and the top access points for all networks at the location gt To view the usage summary for a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG
172. e one or more of the following strategies for initial configuration of the application e Setup a simple location For information about setting up a simple location with a default building and floor a WiFi network and an access point see the following sections Use the Get Started Wizard to Set Up a Location and WiFi Network on page 23 Before you can configure the application you must use the Get Started wizard to set up at least one location and WiFi network Set Up a Basic Location on page 29 Use this procedure after you use the Get Started wizard and the wizard is no longer available to you e Setup a complex location For information about setting up a complex location with custom buildings and floors multiple WiFi networks and multiple access points see Set Up a Complex Location on page 33 e Add access points in bulk For information about adding multiple access points simultaneously that is in bulk see Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously on page 94 You can add these access points before you set up locations or after you do so Once you set up locations you can assign each access point to a floor in a building of a location After you set up at least one location and add one or more WiFi networks and access points you can configure all features that are described in this manual Use the Get Started Wizard to Set Up a Location and WiFi Network Before you can configure the application you must use the Get St
173. e plan for free WiFi access For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 8 Click the NEXT button Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 119 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Captive Portal Profile Add Captive Customize CP Portal Profile Profile Alignment left center right UPLOAD Header Welcome Text To access Internet please enter your purchased voucher ID cme 9 Make sure that the Basic radio button is selected This radio button is selected by default 10 Customize the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Image In relation to the splash page that welcomes the users you can perform the following tasks e By default the right radio button is selected and the image on the splash page is aligned at the right side You can select the center or left radio button e To customize the image on the splash page click the UPLOAD button navigate to an image and upload it to the application Header By default the header text is Welcome You can customize this text Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 120 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Text If you do not offer free access with the voucher the default text that displays on the splash page is To access Internet
174. e source location that you want to copy The Location Profile page displays From the Choose Action menu select Copy Config Copy Config WARNING Configuration for destination location s will be REPLACED by the configuration from the source location Wireless Radio Load Balancing Radio on off E Auto RF Building Controls L AP Management I Radius Server F MAC ACL C QoS L Wireless Network Name ja Destination w Location Name Address B MyNewLocation 33159 Fourth Street Sacramento California United States Corporate 18052 3rd street San Francisco California United States Select the check boxes for the components of the source location that you want to copy and overwrite or create for the destination location In addition to the location configuration you can also copy and overwrite or create the WiFi networks for the destination location In the Destination table select the check box for the destination location You can select more than one check box Click the COPY CONFIG button The source configuration overwrites the destination configuration The Location Profile page displays the source configuration To verify the destination location in the LOCATIONS tree click the name of the destination location The Location Profile page displays the destination location Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 43 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the Basic Settings for a Locat
175. e that lets you easily identify the usage plan for the hotspot Limit access to Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Permitted access hours Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Allow Enter the number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed for one voucher By default no limit is set Use Existing Use From the menu select the shared usage plan that you want to use as the usage plan for the hotspot 15 Take one of the following actions e f you selected the Use Existing radio button go to Step 20 e If you selected the Create New or Copy From Existing radio button click the NEXT button The page that lets you edit the splash page displays 16 Click the Advanced radio button Add Hotspot o _e _o _ 0 Add Hotspot Set Access Set Usage Edit Splash Network Policy Plans Page Edit Splash Page Customize the splash page content by choosing an image for logo a title a message to show to users and a End User License Agreement Basic Advanced Use these templates to customize your own pages DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES Image default png HTML login html error html success html cucu EN 17 To download NETGEAR templates that is default templates that are used for basic hotspots click th
176. e the Application Users Change the Basic Application Account Settings View Application Notifications Note For information about viewing or changing the password for unassigned access points see View or Change the Password for Unassigned Access Points on page 99 256 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage the Cloud Configuration File You can back up the configuration file restore the configuration from a backup file and remove a backup file that you no longer need The backup file is saved on the cloud server not on a local computer The following sections describe how you can manage the cloud configuration file e Back Up the Cloud Configuration File e Restore the Cloud Configuration File e Remove a Cloud Configuration Backup File Back Up the Cloud Configuration File NETGEAR recommends that you back up your cloud configuration regularly so that you can always restore your configuration from a recent backup file gt To back up the configuration file 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Account The My Account page displays 5 In the ACCOUNT tree on the left click Backup Restore The Saved Backups page displays If did not yet back up the configuration file the page does not show
177. e usage summary includes an overview of neighboring and rogue access points for the location To view the security summary for a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Security icon location2 Statistics Security E All Neighboring Access Points PDT gt Q location2 600 Tuesday 06 02 2015 Health 4 Usage 400 gt Ey Wireless Networks 345 Neighbor Access Points Rogue Access Points 2 Pi gt EAccess Points e a gt Q sfdasadad Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Rogue Access Points Neighbor Access Points gt sri homeaP ROGUE ACCESS POINTS Access Points with High Number of Neighbors VW613 35 O0AFAAS VW624 35 0AFE68 VW611 35 0AFC48 E0 91 F 14 03 12 VW744 35 86FB48 VW712 35 8731C8 VW713 35 0AF 848 VW711 35 873700 VW714 35 86F 728 VW741 35 0B07E8 VW621 35 1AF888 Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 214 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The page displays a graph for the total number of neighboring acc
178. e user group The User Group page displays Change the name and usage plan as needed For more information see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a User Group You can remove a user group that you no longer need If you do so the hotspot user accounts that were assigned to the user group remain in the hotspot user database but are no longer assigned to a user group gt To remove a user group 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 142 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 5 In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select User Groups The All User Groups page displays 6 Click the user group The User Group page displays 7 From the Choose Action menu select Delete This User Group A confirmation pop up window displays 8 Click the YES button The user group is removed Manage MAC ACLs Another way to control user access is to set up one or more MAC access control lists ACLs You can either allow or deny access to a network at the location to which you apply the MAC ACL Note NETGEAR recommends that you do not rely only on
179. eared alarms for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays View and Manage Alarms and Events 242 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display In the MONITORING tree click the Health icon The health summary page for the location displays Select Cleared Alarms Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Command Log Event Log Download Full Cleared Alarms Title Severity Alarm Time PDT sr Firmware upgrade failed Disconnected unexpectedly gt Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly AP VW734 35 13E808 AP 20 4E 7F 86 FB 48 AP 20 4E 7F 86 FB A8 AP 20 4E 7F 86 E0 E8 AP 20 4E 7F 86 F7 88 AP 30 46 94 1A F8 88 AP 00 26 F2 F7 D8 88 AP 30 46 94 0C DF 08 AP E0 91 F5 0A F5 C8 AP 0 91 F5 14 71 88 AP E0 9
180. ect a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To drill down to an access point in the Managed Access Points section click an access point name The page displays the summary of statistics for the access point For more information see View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point on page 226 To view the network usage for a single WiFi band in the USAGE section select either the 2 4 GHz link or the 5 GHz link To add the trend of traffic and clients for a WiFi band click the 2 4GHz Clients 5GHz Clients or 5GHz Traffic button or click several buttons By default the 2 4GHz Traffic button is selected and only 2 4 GHz traffic is shown To view the network security for a single WiFi band in the SECURITY section select either the 2 4 GHz link or the 5 GHz link Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 197 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Location Level Monitor the Health of a Location You can monitor the health of a location by various criteria and you can customize the monitoring period for which the statistics and data display The following sections describe how you can monitor the health at a location e View the Health Summary for a Location e View Access Point Details for a Location View the Command Log for a Location Note For information about active alarms cleared alarms and the event log for a location see Location Level View and Manage
181. ect one of the available options from the Network Authentication menu and complete the procedure Then configure the advanced authentication see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 From the Data Encryption menu select the type of encryption In the Network Key field enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters 21 Click the ADD THIS WIRELESS NETWORK button 22 To add more networks to the location repeat Step 78 through Step 21 23 To verify the configuration of the new WiFi networks do the following a In the LOCATIONS tree click the location that you just added The Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display Click the Wireless Networks heading The WiFi network or networks that you just added display In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of a WiFi network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section expands To view other details about the WiFi network on the main page click another section heading for example Security Get Started With Cloud Management 38 Business Central Wireless Manager Application For information about how to change the WiFi network settings see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 e If you are able to access the location with a WiFi device verify that the WiFi network propagated to the location by using the WiFi device to detect the WiFi network f Repeat Step c th
182. ected Clients Refresh Rate 30 Sec 1 Min Last Seen No Total 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ee fee foe Qh wy oO MAC Address 00 00 57 0C 8D 57 00 00 57 0C 8D 5A 00 00 57 0C 8D 5C 00 00 57 0C 8D 60 00 00 57 0C 8D 62 00 00 57 0C 8D 65 00 00 57 0C 8D 68 00 00 64 95 61 1F 00 00 64 95 B1 22 00 00 64 95 B1 24 00 00 64 95 B1 26 00 00 64 95 B1 29 00 00 64 95 B1 2C 00 00 64 95 B1 2F 00 00 64 95 B1 32 SSID a10locinet2 wpa2 a10loc1net2 wpa2 a10loctnet2 wpa2 a10locinet2 wpa2 a10loc1net2 wpa2 a10locinet2 wpa2 a10loc1net2 wpa2 a10loctnet1 open a10locinet1 open a10loctnet1 open a10locinett open a10loctnet1 open a10locinet1 open a10loctnet1 open a10locinet1 open When PDT 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 287 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 28 12 23 57PM 05 287 12 23 57PM 05 28 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 29m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m 0d 4h 30m Channel The page displays a table with the clients that are currently connected to the access point The columns in the table are self explanatory To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a To the right of the MAC Address col
183. ection and Activity Status ona Cloud Enabled Access Point When an access point is cloud enabled its web management interface is a restricted cloud management interface that shows the cloud connection status and cloud activity status Note If you already know the IP address and password of the access point that you want to access you can skip Step 7 and Step 2 in the following procedure and start with Step 3 gt To view the cloud connection status and cloud activity status on a cloud enabled access point 1 To view the IP address of the access point in the application do the following a b Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Cloud Managed Access Points 280 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following e To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click a location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor e f many access points are assigned to the application use the icons a mm below the Choose Acti
184. ectly to the hotspot user database without assigning them to a user group use the following procedure to add the hotspot user accounts to a user group If you want to add different hotspot user accounts to different user groups repeat the procedure for each user group gt To add existing hotspot user accounts to a user group 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 138 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select User Groups The All User Groups page displays 6 Click the user group Name VIPs Usage Plan No Policy L Full Name X Usage Pian v User Group v Created v mhaze Mary Haze Premier VPs 11 06 14 tcuratel Tom Curate Premier VPs 11 06 14 fschnitke Fip Schnitke No Policy 11 06 14 VPs DELETE SELECTED EDIT SELECTED ADD NEW USER ADD EXISTING USERS 7 Click the ADD EXISTING USERS button ADD EXISTING USERS Users Not In Group Users In Group aadamo mhaze ffriuli tcuratelli crubanowitz fschnitke we a a 8 Move the hotspot user accounts to the group a In the Users Not In Group column select a use
185. ee WiFi access with a voucher that is in addition to the period purchased with the voucher select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Note If you offer free WiFi access with a voucher you must select a usage plan which you can do later in this procedure Without a usage plan you cannot offer free WiFi access with a voucher Manage Hotspots for Locations 166 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Copy From Existing Based on From the menu select the shared captive portal on which you want to base the hotspot captive portal Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication The selection from the menu is fixed at Vouchers Redirect users to a Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Voucher Plan Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the voucher plan Voucher Unit Cost Enter an amount in US The selections from the menus are fixed at connected and Hour The amount that you enter is the cost per hour of connection Optional Free Access By default a voucher does not offer free WiFi access and the selection from the menu is No Optional
186. ee access hotspot Do not set usage limits for voucher access You did not select free access in Step 10 1 Leave the No radio button selected which is the default setting 2 Go to Step 20 13 Select a radio button to specify how you want to set up the usage plan or plans for the For the voucher usage limit plan and the free access usage limit plan independently you can create a new usage plan copy and customize an existing usage plan or use an existing usage plan table Setting 14 Configure the settings for voucher access free access or both as described in the following Description Create New Usage Plan Name Limit access to Enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan for the hotspot Use the field and menus to specify the maximum period of allowed access By default the period of access is not limited Permitted access hours Allow Copy From Existing Use the fields and menus to specify the hours during which access is allowed By default access is not limited to specific hours Enter the number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed for one voucher By default no limit is set Based on From the menu select the shared usage plan on which you want to base the usage plan for the hotspot Manage Hotspots for Locations 176 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Usage Plan Name Enter a nam
187. een the application and the access point AP disconnected unexpectedly The access point lost its connection to the application Rogue AP currently detected A cloud managed access point detected a rogue access point Firmware upgrade failed A firmware upgrade failed Apply config failed The application could not apply a configuration to the access point Out of license keys The access point could not connect to the application because no tokens are available License key activation failed A license key was revoked during activation AP disconnected after forced The access point lost its connection to the application after a forced IP IP VLAN change address or VLAN change occurred AP registration failed The application rejected the registration of the access point because no tokens are available View and Manage Alarms and Events 233 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Table 5 Alarms continued Alarm Description Error while parsing command Error while parsing notification No additional description available Error while parsing response Unexpected AutoRF output The application detected an unusual condition with a radio channel or access point during automatic radio frequency auto RF assignment Account Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for Your Account You can view the active alarms for your account acknowledge the alarms and clear the alarms You can view the cleared a
188. election is saved automatically The information in the Type column of the table changes according to your selection WiFi Network Level Monitor a WiFi Network You can view the summary of statistics client usage details and hotspot usage details for a WiFi network over a monitoring period that you can customize The following sections describe how you monitor a WiFi network e View the Summary of Statistics for a WiFi Network e View the Clients That Are Connected to a WiFi Network e View Hotspot Usage for a WiFi Network e Search the Hotspot Database for a WiFi Network Note For information about the event log for a WiFi network see WiFi Network Level View the Event Log for a WiFi Network on page 246 View the Summary of Statistics for a WiFi Network You can view the summary of statistics for a WiFi network over a monitoring period that you can customize The summary of statistics includes an overview of the various types of clients and traffic in the network the network health and the top talkers clients in the WiFi network gt To view the summary of statistics for a WiFi network 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 217 Business Central Wireless
189. eless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name Note Ifyou did not yet add any access points the ADD ACCESS POINT button displays This button serves the same function as the Add Access Point selection from the Choose Action menu see the next step 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Access Point Add Access Point NOTE Please power cycle your Point in order to avoid waiting for it to establish with this cloud management platform The AP Local Password for this e set to the AP Local Password for the Location t is assigned If it is not assigned to a Location the AP Local pass o the Account s Default AP Local Password Th value for this Account s AP Local 6 Inthe Name field enter a name for the access point 7 Inthe Serial Number field enter the precise serial number for the access point Manage Access Points at a Location 82 10 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note Without entering the correct serial number you cannot add the access point to the network Click the ADD THIS ACCESS POINT button The application confirms the addition Click the CLOSE button On the main page the Access Point Profile section displays information about the new
190. ent or click any field in any column for the event b To close the event details click the triangle or field again To view more of the Date PDT column move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous figure To sort the table click a table header View and Manage Alarms and Events 254 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 14 To download the event log as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Event Log link and follow the directions of your browser 15 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following Type information in a field in the table header Make a selection from a menu in the table header Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table View and Manage Alarms and Events 255 Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts You can back up and restore the cloud configuration file and manage access point firmware upgrades application users and account settings This chapter includes the following sections Manage the Cloud Configuration File Manage the Access Point Firmware Through the Application Manag
191. er a name for the access point In the Serial Number field enter the precise serial number for the access point Note Without entering the correct serial number you cannot add the access point to the network Click the ADD THIS ACCESS POINT button The Location Profile page displays showing information about the new location To verify the configuration of the new location with its new WiFi network and access point do the following a In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location that you just added The Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display b Click the Wireless Networks heading The WiFi network that you just added displays c In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of the WiFi network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section expands Get Started With Cloud Management 31 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To view other details about the network on the main page click another section heading for example Security For information about how to change the network settings see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading Building 1 displays The application automatically added this default building when you set up the location In the LOCATIONS tree click Building 1 Floor 1 displays The application automatically added this default floor when you set up the location In the LOCATIONS tree clic
192. er a new secure password b Click the SAVE button The changes are saved The new password is pushed immediately to the cloud managed but unassigned access points Manage Access Points at a Location 100 Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles Radio on off schedules and RADIUS servers are part of the shared settings which you can assign to any location or network depending on the nature of the setting After you set up a radio on off schedule you can assign the schedule to any location Similarly after you configure a RADIUS server profile you can assign the profile to any location Then you can assign the associated RADIUS server to any network at that location This chapter includes the following sections e Manage Radio On Off Schedules e Manage RADIUS Server Profiles 101 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage Radio On Off Schedules A radio on off schedule lets you specify when a WiFi radio must be turned off and back on again For example you can set up a schedule that lets you turn off WiFi radios at night and during weekends Once you set up and enable a schedule you can apply it to one or more locations you do not apply schedules to WiFi networks or access points For information about applying a radio on off schedule to a location see Manage the WiFi Radio or Radios for a Location on page 54 Add a Radio On Off Schedule You can add multiple radio on off schedules
193. ers for a Hotspot Reprint a Voucher or Delete Vouchers Note To manage vouchers you must sign in with a hotspot clerk user account You cannot manage vouchers with an admin or read only user account However only an admin user can send an invitation to someone to set up a hotspot clerk user account see nvite Others to Become Admin Read Only or Hotspot Clerk Application Users on page 265 179 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Accept an Invitation and Sign Up for and Activate a Hotspot Clerk Account The owner of the application and an admin user of the application can send invitations to invite others to become hotspot clerk users If you receive such an invitation before you can access the application you must accept the invitation sign up for an user account and activate the user account gt To accept an invitation sign up for a hotspot clerk user account and activate the user account 1 Open the Invitation Letter email and click the here link Note The entire sentence is Click here to accept the invitation and create your user profile The User Sign Up page displays 2 Under the name of the inviter and your email address specify and confirm a password Your password must consists of at least six characters and must contain at least one uppercase letter A Z at least one lowercase letter a z and at least one number 0 9 The following symbols are allowed in your password I 8 3
194. ess e Deny WiFi devices with MAC addresses on the MAC ACL are denied access This is the default setting 10 In the lower left click the CHOOSE FILE button 11 Follow the directions of your browser to locate and select the csv file with MAC addresses After you select the file the MERGE and REPLACE buttons display o o Import MACs from CSV Download a CSV file template MACACLTemplate csv CHOOSE FILE MERGE Or l REPLACE 12 Click either the MERGE or REPLACE button e MERGE Allows you to keep the existing MAC addresses on the MAC ACL and adds the imported MAC addresses to the ACL e REPLACE Removes the existing MAC addresses from the MAC ACL and adds the imported MAC addresses to the MAC ACL Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 146 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Merge CSV MAC addresses extracted from CSV file Please edit any errors and confirm that all of the information uploaded is correct No MAC Address Errors 1 3C AS F4 45 E6 E4 2 20 54 76 1F B4 44 3 84 3A 4B 9B 2E F2 cme 13 If the application detects a MAC address with errors correct the MAC address on the page or click the associated X icon to remove the MAC address from the list 14 Depending on whether you selected the MERGE button or REPLACE button in Step 12 click the MERGE MACs TO ACL button see the previous figure or REPLACE ACL WITH MACs button Add MAC ACL M
195. ess Manager Application 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add User Group Add User Group Group Name Usage Plan 6 Configure the new user group e Group Name Enter a name for the new user group e Policy Plan As an option from the menu select a usage plan or leave the default No Policy selection For information about usage plans see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 7 Click the ADD THIS USER GROUP button The application confirms the addition of the user group 8 Take one of the following actions e Complete the procedure by clicking the CLOSE button The User Group page displays information about the new user group e Add existing hotspot user accounts to the new user group by continuing with the following step 9 To add existing hotspot user accounts to the new user group click the Add User link Add User Users Not In Group Users In Group aadamo friuli crubanowitz The Users Not In Group column displays user names for existing hotspot user accounts that do not yet belong to a user group Note All other user accounts must be assigned to a user group when you create the user account so they do not display in the Users Not In Group column 10 Move hotspot user accounts to the new user group a Inthe Users Not In Group column select a user name and Click the right arrow The user name displays in the Users in Group column Manage
196. ess Point Without Assigning It to a Location on page 82 Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously on page 94 Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 47 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To add an access point to a floor 10 11 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click a location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display In the LOCATIONS tree click the building that contains the floor to which you want to add an access point From the Choose Action menu select Add Access Point Add Access Point NOTE Please power cycle your Access Point in order to avoid waiting for it to establish connection with this cloud management platform A b vord for t e set to the AP Local Password for the Location to which it is assigned If it is not assigned to a set to the Account s Default AP Local Password The default value for this Account s AP Local In the Name field enter a name for the access point In the Serial Number field enter the precise serial number for the access point Note Without entering the correct seria
197. ess points at the location and states the total number of neighboring and rogue access points at the location In addition the page displays the MAC addresses of any rogue access points and the names of the access points with a high number neighbors If no rogue access points are detected none are reported on the page The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days 7 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 7 Days You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days 8 To view details point to a graph View the Neighbor Details for a Location and Mark Neighbor Access Points You can view the details about neighbor access points at a location over a monitoring period that you can customize Neighbor access points are access points that are not cloud managed You can mark unknown and rogue access points as known access points and you can mark known and rogue access points as unknown access points You can download the entire neighbor access points table as an Excel or csv file To view details about neighbor access points at a location download the neighbor access points table and mark access points as known or unknown 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button Th
198. et Up a MAC ACL by Adding MAC Addresses Manually on page 143 2 Select the MAC ACL for the location at which the network is configured see Select a MAC Access Control List for a Location on page 64 Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 68 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To change the name SSID authentication or encryption for a WiFi network Li 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display Click the network w Network Name and Authentication Network Name HotelGuests Status Enable Disable Network Authentication WPAIWPA2 PSK Data Encryption TKIP AES Network Key eecccccece Show Characters MAC ACL Enforcement Disabled To change the WiFi network name SSID enter a new name in the Network Name field Make a selection from the Network Authentication menu and configure the asso
199. et the unit cost per hour Offer optional free access in addition to paid access Authenticate optional free access Click through Click through with email Usage plan You can select an existing usage plan for free access You can select an existing usage plan for paid access If you offer optional free access with a voucher you can select a second usage plan for free access Splash page Basic You can set the following options e Image for the page Alignment of the image e Header for the page e Text for the page e EULA text and whether the EULA displays You can set the following options Image for the page Alignment of the image Header for the page Text for the page EULA text and whether the EULA displays Advanced You can customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file page styling with CSS is supported Customization includes the following options Login message Login error message Login success message EULA You can customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file page styling with CSS is supported Customization includes the following options Login message Login error message Login success message EULA The following sections describe how you can set up and manage captive portal profiles Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA Add an Advanced Captive Portal P
200. ew Details and Statistics for an Access Point 00 000 230 Chapter 11 View and Manage Alarms and Events Alarm and Event Concepts and Examples 0 eee seen ee ees 233 Account Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for Your Account 234 View and Manage Active Alarms for Your Account 04 234 View the Cleared Alarms for Your Account cece eee ee eee 236 View the Event Log for Your Account 00 e cence eee eee es 238 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Location Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for a Location 240 View and Manage Active Alarms for a Location 005 240 View the Cleared Alarms for a Location 00 cece eee eee ee 242 View the Event Log Tora LOCatiON acs cic cece ctednenaea saaaargaenans 244 WiFi Network Level View the Event Log for a WiFi Network 246 Access Point Level View and Manage Alarms and Events foran Access Point s cc4ccscecenpocedrsddnuehnderenudewes AEE EEE RRA 248 View and Manage Active Alarms for an Access Point 44 248 View the Cleared Alarms for an Access Point 0 000 eee 251 View the Event Log for an Access Point 0 e eee eee eee 253 Chapter 12 Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts Manage the Cloud Configuration File 0 0 cece eee eee eee 257 Back Up the Cloud Configuration File 0
201. ew WiFi Network to a Location e Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network e Disable or Reenable a WiFi Network at a Location e Remove a WiFi Network from a Location Note In addition to the configuration options that are described in this chapter you can add a hotspot to the pool of WiFi networks at a location For information about managing hotspots see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations which describes how you can adda hotspot directly to a location instead of to the pool of WiFi networks at a location The procedures to set up a hotspot for these scenarios are almost identical The only difference is the menu from which you initiate the hotspot wizard 66 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add a New WiFi Network to a Location You can add a WiFi network to a location only not to an individual building or floor For information about how you can circumvent these limitations see Other Planning Considerations on page 18 gt To add anew WiFi network to a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays From the Choose Action menu select Add Wireless
202. f statistics the amount of data the length of the monitoring period and your Internet connection it might take from several seconds to several minutes for some monitoring pages to be updated Note The tables that you can display in the application can show a maximum of 200 entries However for most tables you can download the entire table with all entries even if more than 200 entries exist as an Excel or csv file 187 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Account Level Monitor the Cloud for Your Account You can monitor your cloud account by various criteria and you can customize the monitoring period for which the statistics and data display The following sections describe how you can monitor the cloud for your account e View the Summary of Statistics for Your Account e View Access Point Details for Your Account e View Hotspot Usage for Your Account e Search the Hotspot Database for Your Account Note For information about active alarms cleared alarms and the event log for your account see Account Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for Your Account on page 234 View the Summary of Statistics for Your Account You can view a summary of statistics for network health trend of alarms top statistics for several categories and license usage for your account over a monitoring period that you can customize gt To view the summary of statistics for your account 1 Open a browser on your computer
203. fault the selection from the Firmware Upgrade menu is Notify Me 6 From the Firmware Upgrade menu select Scheduled Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 261 7 8 Business Central Wireless Manager Application CANCEL Firmware Upgrade Scheduled Schedule At 07 00AM LocalTime Preferred Days Elmon Otue Ow Yisat Wisun Set the schedule e Inthe Schedule at field specify the time The local time is affected by the time zone that is set for the location e Next to Preferred Days select the check boxes for the days on which a firmware upgrade is allowed Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Immediately Upgrade Firmware for Cloud Managed Access Points If new firmware is available for cloud managed access points a message similar to the following displays above the main menu bar in the web management interface of the application New firmware is available Firmware upgrade is scheduled at 07 00 AM on Sunday PDT View Dismiss You can update firmware immediately If the application manages different access point models you must upgrade each model separately To immediately upgrade firmware for all cloud managed access points of one model l 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home
204. fer to force apply uncheck the checkbox below Use safe apply Enter the IP address network mask default gateway and primary and secondary DNS servers To force the static IP address configuration onto the access point even if the access point cannot connect to the Internet with the static configuration clear the Use safe apply check box By default the application tests the static IP address configuration If the access point cannot connect to the Internet with the static configuration the application automatically rolls back to the previous configuration with which the access point was able to connect to the Internet and raises an alarm In such a situation you are directed to specify if you want to keep the old IP address configuration or try the new static configuration again Even if the access point cannot connect to the Internet with the new static configuration you can force the application to accept the new static configuration Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage Access Points at a Location 87 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Specify the Management VLAN Settings for an Access Point The VLAN settings for an access point determine the access point s management VLAN For information about the VLAN that is assigned to clients when they access a WiFi network see Change the WiFi Network VLAN Settings o
205. ft of the alarm or click any field in any column for the alarm except for a field in the Source column For more information about the fields in the Source column see Step 75 b To close the alarm details click the triangle or field again To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the alarms as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Cleared Alarms link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table To view more information about the access point that is the source of the alarm click a field in the Source column The summary page for the access point displays For more information see View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point on page 226 View the Event Log for a Location You can view the event log for a location The application can display a maximum of 200 events but you can download the entire event log as an Excel or csv file A downloaded log includes debug level events that a
206. ge that provides more information click an SSID in the Top 3 Wireless Networks section or click a location in the Top 3 Wireless Networks section or Top 3 Locations section For more information about the pages to which you can drill down see the following sections Drill down to a location See Location Level View the Summary of Statistics for a Location on page 196 Drill down to an SSID See WiFi Network Level Monitor a WiFi Network on page 217 Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 189 Business Central Wireless Manager Application View Access Point Details for Your Account You can view details about cloud managed access points for your account over a monitoring period that you can customize The details include the health status alarm state location building floor channels output power number of clients and more You can download the entire access points table as an Excel or csv file To view access point details for your account and download the access points table 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Select AP Details Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v MANAGE
207. he access point web management interface later do the following a Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com b The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name Cloud Managed Access Points 282 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e To narrow the access points that display do the following e To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click a location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor e f many access points are assigned to the application use the icons a mm below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information f On the main page click the access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point g Scroll down and click the IP Settings heading The IP address displays Take note of the IP address which you will need in Step 5 From the Choose Action menu select Delete this Access Point A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES butto
208. he pop up window that displays depends on whether or not the usage plan is in use 8 Take one of the following actions e Ifthe usage plan is not in use the Confirmation pop up window displays Do the following Click the OK button The usage plan is removed e Ifthe usage plan is in use the Usage Plan In Use pop up window displays Do the following a Click the OK button The pop up window closes b Find the captive portals hotspots user groups and user accounts to which the usage plan is assigned c Disassociate the usage plan from the components to which is it assigned d Repeat this procedure to remove the usage plan Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 130 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage Hotspot User Accounts for Cloud AAA Hotspots A hotspot user is a user who accesses a WiFi network that provides free or paid for access through a captive portal A hotspot user account is intended for long term use for example for a Known and recurring visitor to an office floor Users who access a WiFi network that provides access without a captive portal are regular WiFi users and do not require hotspot user accounts Hotspot users are not related to vouchers Users who access a hotspot that provides voucher access and users who access a free hotspot do not require hotspot user accounts In normal situations the network authentication for such types of hotspots is Open System w
209. her and for Monitoring Hotspot Usage 00 eee 153 Add a Basic Hotspot for Free Access 00 cece eee eee tees 154 Add an Advanced Hotspot for Free Access 20 e cece eee eee ees 159 Add a Basic Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher 00005 164 Add an Advanced Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher 172 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Changed Hospotiscntico cine casas aeqagumitnysyene kes ebesweeewaneawees 178 REMOVECHMOtSPOl ott ces acc cis a a o a sumed 178 Chapter 9 Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account Accept an Invitation and Sign Up for and Activate a Hotspot Clerk Account 180 Sell and Generate a Voucher 00 ccc ccc cece cee eee eee 181 View the Status of Vouchers for a Hotspot Reprint a Voucher or Delete Vouchers 0 0 0 0 cc ccc cece eee eee eee ees 184 Chapter 10 Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points Account Level Monitor the Cloud for Your Account 004 188 View the Summary of Statistics for Your Account 005 188 View Access Point Details for Your Account 0 eee eee eee 190 View Hotspot Usage for Your Account 0c cece eee eee ee 191 Search the Hotspot Database for Your Account 20000 194 Location Level View the Summary of Statistics for a Location 196 Location Level Monitor the Health of a Location 05
210. hour that is the last hour to 30 days Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 218 9 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To add or remove information about clients and traffic click the Wi Fi Clients 2 4GHz Clients 2 4GHz Traffic 5GHz Clients or 5GHz Traffic button or click several buttons By default the Wi Fi Traffic button is selected and only WiFi traffic is shown for both WiFi bands 10 To view details point to the graph View the Clients That Are Connected to a WiFi Network You can view details about all clients that are connected to a WiFi network To view details about clients that are connected to a WiFi network 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Wireless Networks icon All WiFi networks at the location display Click a WiFi network The summary page for the WiFi network displays Select Clients Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 219 Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v Current Connected Clients No Tot
211. hrough Usage Plan No Policy Client separation will be enabled on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login 6 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Profile Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal Authentication From the menu select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication required is to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through e Cloud AAA User name and password are required to sign in Note For information about the Vouchers option see Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 122 Usage Plan From the menu select a usage plan By default the selection from the menu is No Policy For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Redirect users toa Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http 7 Click the NEXT button The basic customization page displays 8 Click the Advanced button Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 115 9 10 11 12 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add Captive Portal Profile Basic Advanced Use these templates to customize your o
212. ht automatically reformat the MAC addresses in scientific notation Make sure that the column with MAC addresses in the csv file does not contain any type of formatting To download a template and set up a MAC ACL by importing a file with MAC addresses T 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 145 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add MAC ACL Add MAC ACL MAC ACL Name Treat List As Allow Deny Show available clients at All Location MM macact o W Available Wireless Clients ADD Remove Import MACs from CSV Download a CSY file template CHOOSE FILE o EN 6 To download a template click the Download a CSV file template link and follow the directions of your browser to save the file to your computer 7 If you did not set up your list of MAC addresses do so now When you are ready continue with the next step In the MAC ACL Name field enter a name that lets you easily identify the MAC ACL Next to Treat List As select a radio button e Allow WiFi devices with MAC addresses on the MAC ACL are allowed acc
213. iFi network that provides access through a captive portal You assign a hotspot to a location A hotspot can offer free access access that is paid for with a voucher or a combination of both A hotspot can also offer access that is paid for in another form for example added onto the total of a bill and administered through cloud AAA 1 When you set up a hotspot you can select a captive portal and a usage plan Therefore first set up the captive portals see Manage Captive Portal Profiles on page 109 and usage plans see Manage Usage Plans on page 127 that you might need for the hotspot This chapter includes the following sections Hotspot Overview Add a Basic Hotspot for Free Access Add an Advanced Hotspot for Free Access Add a Basic Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher Add an Advanced Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher Change a Hotspot Remove a Hotspot For information about hotspot users see Manage Hotspot User Accounts for Cloud AAA Hotspots on page 131 For information about hotspot user groups see Manage User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots on page 135 1 You cannot directly set up a hotspot with cloud AAA authentication but you can do so indirectly by assigning a captive portal that uses cloud AAA authentication to a WiFi network 150 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Hotspot Overview You can add a hotspot directly to a location or to the pool of WiFi networks at a location The procedures t
214. ianceSeuitivans pesduawedeses 130 Manage Hotspot User Accounts for Cloud AAA Hotspots 131 View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account 131 Change an Existing Hotspot User Account 0 eee eee eee 133 Remove a Hotspot User ACCOUNT ss ac dcils dears etek ee8oiee Gaim aac 134 Manage User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots eee cece ee eee 135 Adda User Group sco cctsenca esd ate segiguiuuualewremeeyesesetes sees s 135 Add a New Hotspot User Account to a User Group 0 eee 137 Add an Existing Hotspot User Accounts to a User Group 138 Change a Hotspot User Account in a User Group 000 ee eee 140 Remove One or More Hotspot User Account froma User Group 141 Change the Group Name or Usage Plan for a User Group 142 Remove a SER GrOUDiese si o 5 05 c05ahareiraune aeons suage biered na 142 ManageMAC ACES 26 sacaaastataud e E E EE 143 Set Up a MAC ACL by Adding MAC Addresses Manually 143 Set Up a MAC ACL by Importing a File with MAC Addresses 145 Change a MAC ACK ici cccws ge herh sempre mmekeses reek eee oe anewe s 148 Removed MAC AGE osc cueceniieon madmoon oo RE am m anit 148 Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Hotspot OVET VEW nerean ne E A E EEA 0 2 E Bed Babbage 151 Hotspot Options cia cccecccentaresrettinnenimdiGmereneweencececeeae he 152 Roadmap for Providing and Acquiring Hotspot Access with a Vouc
215. ick the VIEW button Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details DD al Search Result Summary General Usage Identifier DD1E15D6 Total Tx Bytes 106 81 MB SSID GolfWeek Total Rx Bytes 28 97 MB Location SunnyMountainResort Total of Sessions 1 Current Connection State Disconnected Total Purchase 12 First Connected time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Remaining Time 0d 11h 33m Last Connected Time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Expiration date N A Total Connected Time 0d 0h 26m Trend PDT Details By default the summary for the hotspot user displays c To view the trend or the details for the hotspot user click the Trend PDT or Details heading respectively Location Level View the Summary of Statistics for a Location You can view the summary of statistics for network health trend of alarms top statistics for several categories and license usage for a location over a monitoring period that you can customize To view the summary of statistics for a location T 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 196 5 10 Busi
216. ick the user row All fields in the user row highlight blue and the VIEW button becomes available b Click the VIEW button Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details DD gt Search Result Summary General Usage Identifier DD1E15D6 Total Tx Bytes 106 81 MB SSID GolfWeek Total Rx Bytes 28 97 MB Location SunnyMountainResort Total of Sessions 1 Current Connection State Disconnected Total Purchase 12 First Connected time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Remaining Time 0d 11h 33m Last Connected Time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Expiration date N A Total Connected Time 0d 0h 26m Trend PDT gt Details By default the summary for the hotspot user displays c To view the trend or the details for the hotspot user click the Trend PDT or Details heading respectively Location Level Monitor the Security at a Location You can view the security summary and neighbor details for a location over a monitoring period that you can customize The following sections describe how you can monitor the security at a location e View the Security Summary for a Location e View the Neighbor Details for a Location and Mark Neighbor Access Points Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 213 Business Central Wireless Manager Application View the Security Summary for a Location You can view the security summary for a location over a monitoring period that you can customize Th
217. ick to obtain paid access In addition the splash page shows the Continue button that the user must click to obtain a period of free access Click Through With Email The splash page shows the default text or your customized text a field in which the user must enter the voucher number and the Submit button that the user must click to obtain paid access In addition the splash page shows a field in which the user must enter an email address and the Continue button that the user must click to obtain a period of free access EULA By default the On radio button is selected and the user can click the Terms and Conditions link on the splash page to view the default EULA You can change the text of the EULA You can select the Off radio button in which case the EULA is not accessible to the user on the splash page 18 To preview the splash page click the PREVIEW button in the upper right of the Image section 19 To change your customization of the splash page and start again click the RESET button 20 Click the ADD THIS HOTSPOT button The Network Name and Authentication section displays showing the settings for the new hotspot By default the network authentication is configured as an open system and the hotspot does not provide data encryption For information about how to change the network authentication data encryption and other network settings for the hotspot see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68
218. icons amp below the Choose Action menu to search for the access point b On the main page click the access point configuration The summary page for the access point displays Select Event Log Summary Clients Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Download Full Event Log No Title Source Severity Date PDT 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 9 o Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 VW612 35 334408 Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical 05 12 56PM 04 29 05 10 43PM 04 29 05 10 29PM 04 29 05 08 42PM 04 29 05 08 27PM 04 29 05 05 16PM 04 29 05 05 02PM 04 29 05 02 52PM 04 29 05 02 38PM 04 29 05 00 55PM 04 29 The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the events as Last 30 Days To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right tst3 0s You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To see details about an event do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the ev
219. iew more information about the access point that is the source of the alarm click a field in the Source column The summary page for the access point displays For more information see View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point on page 226 15 To acknowledge one several or all alarms do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the alarms or to select all alarms select the check box in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Acknowledge Alarm The entries in the Acknowledged column change from No to Yes 16 To clear one several or all alarms do the following a Select one or more check boxes to the left of the alarms or to select all alarms select the check box in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Clear Alarm The entries are removed from the table and moved to the cleared alarms table see View the Cleared Alarms for Your Account on page 236 View the Cleared Alarms for Your Account You can view the cleared alarms for your account The application can display a maximum of 200 cleared alarms but you can download the entire alarms history as an Excel or csv file gt To view and download the cleared alarms for your account 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays View and Manage Alarms and Events 236 Business Central Wireless Manager Applicati
220. ighboring access points with the option to mark access points as known and unknown For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 10 Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points and Chapter 11 View and Manage Alarms and Events Account Management Functions Account management lets you manage licenses add and invite application users schedule access point firmware updates or run updates immediately and back up and restore application settings For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 12 Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts and Chapter 13 Manage Application Licenses and Tokens Wizards for Ease of Configuration The application provides the following wizards for ease of configuration e Get Started wizard Before you can configure the application you must use the Get Started wizard to set up at least one location and WiFi network For more information see Use the Get Started Wizard to Set Up a Location and WiFi Network on page 23 e Location wizard Lets you add a location and as options lets you add a WiFi network and an access point to the location For more information see Set Up a Basic Location on page 29 e WiFi network wizard Lets you configure the network authentication and data encryption for a WiFi network assign the WiFi network to one or more radios and add the WiFi Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 13 Business Central Wireless Man
221. ill be created with OPEN authentication Please note that you can configure other authentication types by directly editing this wireless network after completing this wizard Hotspot Name Wireless Network on 2 4GHz and 5GHz Specify the following settings e Hotspot Name Enter the name that must serve as the SSID for the hotspot Manage Hotspots for Locations 160 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e Wireless Network on From the menu select the WiFi band or bands on which the hotspot must be accessible 8 Click the NEXT button Add Hotspot O _ Add Hotspot Set Access Network Policy Set Access Policy Set access policy for your hotspot by configuring a Captive Portal Profile You can either create a new profile copy from an existing profile or use existing profile Captive Portal Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Captive Portal Profile Authentication Click Through Client separation will be enable on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login 9 Select a radio button to specify which type of captive portal must be used for the hotspot You can create a new captive portal copy and customize an existing captive portal or use an existing captive portal 10 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Create New Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the
222. information about adding a basic captive portal profile for free access see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 117 To add an advanced captive portal profile for voucher access 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Captive Portal Profile The Captive Portal wizard starts Add Captive Portal Profile Profile Name Authentication Click Through Usage Plan No Policy Client separation will be enabled on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login CANCEL NEXT Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 122 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 6 From the Authentication menu select Vouchers Note For information about the Click Through Click Through With Email and Cloud AAA options see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 111 Add Captive Portal Profile 1 Profile Name Authentication Vouchers Ad Captive Portal Profile Client separation will be enabled on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login Voucher Access Settings Voucher Plan Name Usage
223. ing access control for hotspot users who are authenticated through cloud AAA Access point credentials that is setting a global password for accessing the web management interfaces of cloud managed access points RADIUS server MAC access control list WiFi QoS including WMM and WMM Powersave WiFi Network Functions For each WiFi network that you set up at a location you can configure and manage multiple features For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 4 Manage WiFi Networks at a Location except where otherwise indicated in the following list You can configure and manage the following features Select network authentication data encryption and MAC ACL enforcement for the WiFi network Set security including broadcast of the network name SSID and client separation for the WiFi network Specify the VLAN for the WiFi network Select the radio for dual band access points for the WiFi network Enable and select a captive portal for free access cloud AAA access or voucher access Add hotspots with free access or voucher access For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Sell and generate vouchers available only to users with a hotspot clerk user account For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 9 Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account Access Point Functions For each access point that you assign to a location you can configure and man
224. ing pages you can select a monitoring period longer than seven days but not for this table For this table you can also select Future to display only the commands that are pending 10 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right 11 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 202 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 12 To sort the table click a table header 13 To download the command log as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Command Log link and follow the directions of your browser 14 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table 15 To view details about a command click the command name in the Title column COMMAND DETAILS 29 system wianSettings wianSettingTable wian0 channel 1 system wlanSettings wianSettingTable wian0 tPower 2 system wianSettings wianSettingTable wian1 channel 40 system wianSettings wianSettingTable wian1 hPower 0 COPY TO CLIPBOARD 16 To copy th
225. ion Table 4 Hotspot options continued Feature Hotspot Free Access Hotspot Voucher Access Usage plan You can set the following options You can set the following options New usage plan e Maximum number of total free e Maximum number of total paid Copy from existing usage access hours during a period access hours during a period plan e Hours during which free access e Hours during which paid access Use existing usage plan is allowed is allowed e Number of concurrent Internet connections that are allowed with one voucher Usage plan for optional free access Not applicable You can set the following options New usage plan e Maximum number of total free Copy from existing usage access hours during a period plan e Hours during which free access Use existing usage plan is allowed Roadmap for Providing and Acquiring Hotspot Access with a Voucher and for Monitoring Hotspot Usage The following high level steps are involved in providing hotspot access with a voucher acquiring hotspot access with a voucher and monitoring the voucher status hotspot users and hotspot usage 1 An admin user sets up a basic or advanced hotspot for voucher access For more information see Add an Advanced Hotspot for Free Access on page 159 or Add an Advanced Hotspot for Access Through a Voucher on page 172 2 In the unusual situation that the hotspot for voucher access does not provide Open System network authentication without
226. ion Profile You can change the basic settings that is the location name and address for a location profile You cannot change the country and time zone for an existing location profile For information about changing other location settings see Manage WiFi and Global Settings for a Location on page 54 gt To change the location name and address of a location profile 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays Change the location name location address or both Click the APPLY button The changes are saved Remove a Location You can remove a location with all its settings and WiFi networks from your account gt To remove a location from your account 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays Manage Locations B
227. ion about access points by alarm and connection time The page also displays the location on a map The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days 7 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right tst7 oas You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days 8 To view details point to the graph or an access point name 9 To drill down to an access point click an access point name The page displays the summary of statistics for the access point For more information see View the Summary of Statistics for an Access Point on page 226 View Access Point Details for a Location You can view details about cloud managed access points for a location over a monitoring period that you can customize The details include the health status alarm state location building floor channels output power number of clients and more You can download the entire access points table as an Excel or csv file Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 199 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To view access point details for a location and download the access points table 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Moni
228. ion2 Location location2 Location location2 Location location2 Location location2 Location location2 1 2 3 4 15 6 7 8 9 Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message Notification message VW712 35 8731C8 VW712 35 8731C8 VW712 35 8731C8 VW713 35 0AF848 VW713 35 0AF848 VW711 35 873700 VW711 35 873700 Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical 05 15 55PM 04 29 05 15 55PM 04 29 05 15 52PM 04 29 05 15 44PM 04 29 05 15 44PM 04 29 05 15 43PM 04 29 05 15 42PM 04 29 aasman ee ere meme an sr Re asinn The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the events as Last 30 Days To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right t2st3 0 ys You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To see details about an event do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the event or click any field in any column for the event b To close the event details click the triangle or field again To view more of the Date PDT column move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the event log as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Event Log
229. ireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Access Points icon All access points assigned to the location display To select the access point do one of the following e If only a few access points are assigned to the location on the main page click the access point configuration e If many access points are assigned to the location and you know the building and floor to which the access point is assigned do the following a In the MONITORING tree click the building and then the floor b In the MONITORING tree click the access point Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 228 10 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e If many access points are assigned to the application and you do not know the building and floor do the following a On the main page use the icons m below the Choose Action menu to search for the access point b On the main page click the access point configuration The summary page for the access point displays 8 Select Clients Summary Clients Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Currently Conn
230. isplays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click a location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display In the LOCATIONS tree click a building The floors at the building display Click the floor The floor fields display From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Floor A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The floor is removed from the building Change the Name for a Building You can change the name for a building To change the name for a building 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click a location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 52 7 8 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Click the building The Building Name field displays Change the name Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a Building from a Location You can remove a floor that you no longer need
231. isting profile or use existing profile Captive Portal Create New Copy From Existing Use Existing Captive Portal Profile Authentication Vouchers Client separation will be enable on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login Voucher Access Settings Voucher Plan Name Voucher Unit Cost Select a radio button to specify which type of captive portal must be used for the hotspot You can create a new captive portal copy and customize an existing captive portal or use an existing captive portal Manage Hotspots for Locations 173 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 10 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Create New Captive Portal Profile Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal for the hotspot Authentication The selection from the menu is fixed at Vouchers Redirect users to a Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Voucher Plan Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the voucher plan Voucher Unit Cost Enter an amount in US The selections from the menus are fixed at connected and Hour The amount that you enter is the cost per hour of connection Optional Free Access By default a voucher does not offer free WiFi access and the selection from the menu is No
232. ithout data encryption IMPORTANT The only type of hotspot user for which you must set up a hotspot user account is the user who accesses a hotspot through cloud AAA You can add a new hotspot user account directly to the hotspot users database If the hotspot user account is not member of a user group the hotspot user cannot access the cloud AAA hotspot However at any time you can add an existing hotspot user account to a user group see Add an Existing Hotspot User Accounts to a User Group on page 138 Adding a usage plan for the hotspot user account is optional Instead of adding a new hotspot user account directly to the hotspot user database you can add a new user hotspot account to a user group see Add a New Hotspot User Account to a User Group on page 137 In that case the hotspot user account is also automatically added to the hotspot user database The following sections describe how you can set up and manage hotspot user accounts e View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account e Change an Existing Hotspot User Account e Remove a Hotspot User Account View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account You can add a new hotspot user account directly to the hotspot users database If you want to assign the hotspot user account to a hotspot user group first add the user group see Add a User Group on page 135 If you want to assign a usage plan to a hotspot user account which is op
233. ities depending on the type of data Time dependent information such as video or audio receives a higher priority than normal traffic For WMM to function correctly wireless clients also must support WMM WMM supports Quality of Service QoS control for upstream traffic flowing from a wireless device to an access point and for downstream traffic flowing from the access point to a wireless device Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 64 Business Central Wireless Manager Application WMM defines the following four queues in decreasing order of priority e Voice The highest priority queue with minimum delay which makes it ideal for applications like VoIP and streaming media e Video The second highest priority queue with low delay is given to this queue Video applications are routed to this queue e Best Effort The medium priority queue with medium delay is given to this queue Most standard IP applications use this queue e Background Low priority queue with high throughput Applications such as FTP that are not time sensitive but require high throughput can use this queue The WMM Powersave feature saves power for battery powered equipment by increasing the efficiency and flexibility of data transmission By default the Wi Fi Multimedia WMM and WMM Powersave features are enabled for a location To manage the wireless QoS for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wirele
234. ity heading The Security section displays Next to Broadcast Network Name SSID select one the following radio buttons e Yes The SSID is broadcast This is the default setting e No The SSID is not broadcast A user must know the SSID to be able to connect to the network Next to Client Security Separation select one the following radio buttons e Enable Client separation is enabled Clients on the same network or hotspot cannot communicate with each other e Disable Client separation is disabled Clients on the same network or hotspot can communicate with each other This is the default setting Note The client security separation setting of a captive portal policy takes precedence over the client security separation setting for the WiFi network Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 73 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the WiFi Network VLAN Settings By default all clients that access a WiFi network are assigned to VLAN 1 You can change the VLAN ID For information about specifying the management VLAN for an access point see Specify the Management VLAN Settings for an Access Point on page 88 To change
235. k Floor 1 The access point that you just added displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the name of the access point On the main page the Access Point Profile section expands Verify that the access point is connected to the cloud v Access Point Profile Name netgearl37EE8 Serial Number 29210A5W000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F7 17 7E E7 Location SunnyMountainResort Building Building 1 Floor Floor 1 State Time Since Power Up 0d 0h 2m Alarms Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the application detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting for connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Get Started With Cloud Management 32 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the acces
236. l cloud managed access point override the RF assignment and automatic Tx power adjustment from the location setting By default auto RF assignment and automatic Tx power adjustment are enabled and run every day at 12 00 a m Note If a radio is in the Always OFF state or not scheduled automatic radio frequency auto RF assignment does not function For auto RF assignment to function a radio must be either in the Always ON state or scheduled If a radio is scheduled but off according to the schedule auto RF assignment does run because it turns the radio on at the start of the process and turns the radio off at the completion of the process To manage RF assignment and output power for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6 On the main page click the Auto RF heading Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 59 Business Central Wireless Manager Application v Auto RF Schedule Channel and or Power Analyze and adjust wireless power y a and or channel settings every 12 00AM ma Vl Mon Ml Tue M Wed MThu MFi M Sat M Sun Channel Allocation 2 4
237. l Wireless Manager 21 Get Started With Cloud Management Before you can manage WiFi networks in the cloud you must set up one or more locations add One or more WiFi networks to each location and add and assign access points to each location This chapter includes the following sections e Strategies for the Initial Configuration e Use the Get Started Wizard to Set Up a Location and WiFi Network e Set Up a Basic Location e Set Up a Complex Location Note For information about preparing your access points and subscribing to the BCWM application see the NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager Quick Start Guide which you can download from downloadcenter netgear com 22 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Strategies for the Initial Configuration The first step in setting up a location with WiFi networks is to define the location By default each location includes a default building Building 1 and default floor Floor 1 However under one location you can set up multiple buildings each with multiple floors You assign access points and WiFi networks independently of each other Because you assign an access point to a floor in a building of a location but you assign a WiFi network to a location only that is not to a floor or a building you can first set up access points and then WiFi networks or the other way around The application assigns WiFi networks automatically to cloud managed access points Us
238. l number you cannot add the access point to the network Click the ADD THIS ACCESS POINT button On the main page the Access Point Profile section displays information about the new access point Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 48 Business Central Wireless Manager Application v Access Point Profile Name netgear137EES Serial Number 29210A5W000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F7 17 7E E7 Location SunnyMountainResort Building Lobby and Restaura Floor Floor 1 Time Since Power Up 0d 0h 2m Alarms 1 Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the application detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting for connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the access point push the configuratio
239. larms and event log for your account The following sections describe how you view and manage alarms and events for your account e View and Manage Active Alarms for Your Account e View the Cleared Alarms for Your Account e View the Event Log for Your Account View and Manage Active Alarms for Your Account You can view the active alarms for your account acknowledge the alarms and clear the alarms After you clear the alarms you can still view them in the alarm history that is the table with cleared alarms Acknowledging an alarm moves the state to acknowledged Clearing an alarm removes the alarm from the active table and adds the alarm to the cleared alarms table If you do not acknowledge an active alarm the alarm remains in memory unless an event occurs that clears the alarm automatically and adds the alarm to the cleared alarms table The application can display a maximum of 200 active alarms but you can download the entire active alarms table as an Excel or csv file gt To view manage and download active alarms for your account 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays View and Manage Alarms and Events 234 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays Business Central Wireless Manager A
240. le eee ees 76 Disable or Reenable a WiFi Network at a Location 02 eee ee 77 Remove a WiFi Network from a Location cece cece eee ees 78 Chapter 5 Manage Access Points at a Location Add an Access Point and Assign It to a Building and Floor 80 Add an Access Point Without Assigning It to a Location 82 Assign an Access Point to a Location 0 0 0 84 Manage Access Point SettingS 0 eee eee 85 Change the Access Point Name 0 e cece ees 85 Configure a Static IP Address for an Access Point e2000 86 Specify the Management VLAN Settings for an Access Point 88 Manage the Access Point Antenna Settings 00 89 Configure a Static Channel for an Access Point 0000 200 eee 90 Configure Static Output Power for an Access Point 000 91 Manage the Syslog Settings for an Access Point 00005 92 Reboot an Access Point 0 cece cece cece eee eee e eens 93 Remove an Access Point from Your Account 0 0 cece cece eee ee eee 93 Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously 0 00 eee 94 View or Change the Password for Unassigned Access Points 99 Chapter 6 Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles Manage Radio On Off Schedules o 0 20 sadonstekedioGesevew ev arenas 102 Add a Radio On Off Schedule 5 4 0s0idce
241. le on page 112 Profile for voucher access See the table on page 119 8 Click the CUSTOMIZE button 9 Change the splash page settings as needed For more information about these settings see one of the following sections Profile for free access with basic splash page See the table on page 113 Profile for free access with advanced splash page See the steps on page 776 Profile for voucher access with basic splash page See the table on page 120 Profile for voucher access with advanced splash page See the steps on page 124 10 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a Captive Portal Profile You can remove a Captive portal profile or hotspot that you no longer need If the captive portal profile is in use you cannot remove it In such a situation you must find the location and network or hotspot to which the captive portal profile is assigned and disassociate the captive portal profile from the network or hotspot Once it is disassociated you can remove the captive portal profile Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To remove a captive portal profile 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration
242. lication Users and Accounts 258 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Created Date PDT X Description 12 22 11AM 05 12 2015 K includes 2 locations with full configs Select the check box for the backup file from which you want to restore the configuration The previous figure shows only a single backup file The RESTORE button becomes available Click the RESTORE button Created at 12 22 11AM 05 12 2015 The restore process will replace your Locations Networks and Shared Settings as they were at the time the backup was created Locations Networks and Shared Settings created since the backup will be lost 7 Create a backup of the current system before restoring from this one Name Description These are the only locations that will exist after the restore Created after this backup was made operation SunnyMountainResort Corporate Warning These locations will be erased The page lists the locations that are restored and the locations that will be removed after the restore process is completed By default the application creates a new backup file of the configuration before it restores the configuration to the one on the backup file that you selected in Step 6 Enter a name for the new backup file A description is optional Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 259 10 11 12 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note If you do not
243. lication detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting for connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Manage Access Points at a Location 81 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the access point push the configuration to the access point and automatically reboot the access point again 14 To view other details about the access point on the main page click another section heading for example IP Setting For information about how to change the access point settings see Manage Access Point Settings on page 85 Add an Access Point Without Assigning It to a Location Before you add the access point to the application make sure that your access point runs the required firmware see Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access Points on page 19 that you reset it to factory defaults and that you power cycle it gt To add an access point to the application without assigning it to a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wir
244. link and follow the directions of your browser View and Manage Alarms and Events 245 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 14 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table WiFi Network Level View the Event Log for a WiFi Network You can view the event log for a WiFi network which can include events such as the sale of vouchers for the network The application can display a maximum of 200 events but you can download the entire event log as an Excel or csv file A downloaded log includes debug level events that are not displayed onscreen Except for debug events events are automatically cleared after 30 days Debug events are automatically cleared after 7 days Note The application does not generate alarms for a WiFi network but can generate alarms for an access point that broadcasts the WiFi network see View and Manage Active Alarms for an Access Point on page 248 gt To view and download the event log for a WiFi network 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https
245. lowing a In the table select the check box for the voucher b From the Choose Action menu select Reprint a voucher The voucher displays Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 185 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 10 To delete one or more vouchers do the following a Inthe table select the check boxes for the vouchers b From the Choose Action menu select Delete voucher The vouchers are removed from the table 11 To delete all vouchers do the following a Select the check box in the in the table header b From the Choose Action menu select Delete voucher All vouchers are removed from the table Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 186 Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points You can view summary and detailed information about your cloud account and the locations WiFi networks and access points that are configured including real time and historical information performance statistics and traffic usage This chapter includes the following sections e Account Level Monitor the Cloud for Your Account e Location Level View the Summary of Statistics for a Location e Location Level Monitor the Health of a Location e Location Level Monitor the Usage at a Location e Location Level Monitor the Security at a Location e WiFi Network Level Monitor a WiFi Network e Access Point Level Monitor an Access Point Note Depending on the number o
246. lways on This is the default setting e Always OFF The 5 GHz radio is always off e Scheduled Both the 5 GHz radio and the 2 4 GHz radio turn on and off according to a schedule The Schedule Profile menu becomes available allowing you to select a schedule The schedule that you select applies to both radios Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 55 Bus Setting iness Central Wireless Manager Application Description Schedule Profile 2 4GHz configuration If the selection from the 2 4GHz Radio or 5GHz Radio menu is Scheduled select a radio schedule from the Schedule Profile menu The schedule that you select applies to both radios For information about setting up a schedule see Manage Radio On Off Schedules on page 102 Wireless Mode Channel Width Note Does not apply to the 11b and 11bg wireless modes 5GHz configuration By default the highest supported wireless mode is selected for the 2 4 GHz radio 11ng You can select one of the following wireless modes 11b Both 802 11n and 802 11g devices can connect to the access point because they are backward compatible but they function at limited speed 11bg 802 11n devices can connect to the access point because they are backward compatible but they function at limited speed 802 119 devices function at limited speed if 802 11a devices are also connected 11ng This is the default setting 802 11b devices cannot connect to the access point
247. m Existing radio button click the NEXT button The page that lets you edit the splash page displays 12 Click the Advanced radio button Add Hotspot Add Hotspot ss Edit Splash Network Page Edit Splash Page Customize the splash page content by choosing an image for logo a title a message to show to users and a End User License Agreement Basic Advanced Use these templates to customize your own pages DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES UPLOAD FILE Image default png HTML login html error html success html 13 To download NETGEAR templates that is default templates that are used for basic hotspots click the DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES button and follow the directions of your browser to save the zip file to a location on your computer You can alter these default templates or use the default templates as examples to create your own templates You must keep indicators that relate to elements such as style input and email in the source file Otherwise the template will not function The name of the zip file depends on the type of authentication that you are using for the hotspot e Click Through cp_template_click_through zip e Click Through With Email cp_template_click_through_email zip Manage Hotspots for Locations 162 Business Central Wireless Manager Application After you set up a custom template you can upload it to the application making sure that you do not change the zip file name for the type of authenti
248. m the Choose Action menu select Add Captive Portal Profile Add Captive Portal Profile Profile Name Authentication Click Through Usage Plan No Policy Client separation will be enabled on this network Redirect users to a specified website after login coc Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 111 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Profile Name Authentication Enter a name that lets you easily identify the captive portal From the menu select one of the following options e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through e Cloud AAA User name and password are required to sign in Note For information about the Vouchers option see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 117 Usage Plan Redirect users to a From the menu select a usage plan By default the selection from the menu is No Policy For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Select this check box to direct the user to a website after login specified website after login In the field that displays enter the website beginning with http Click the NEXT button Add Captive Portal Profile Basic
249. many access points are assigned to the location and you know the building and floor to which the access point is assigned do the following a In the MONITORING tree click the building and then the floor b In the MONITORING tree click the access point e If many access points are assigned to the application and you do not know the building and floor do the following a On the main page use the icons amp below the Choose Action menu to search for the access point b On the main page click the access point configuration The summary page for the access point displays 8 Select Details Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 230 Summary Clients Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log ACCESS POINT SETTING Name Health AP Uptime MAC 2 4GHz MAC 5GHz MAC Country Firmware Serial IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Date Added Date Provisioned Model Location Timezone of Networks of Neighbors DHCP Client Refresh rate LAN STATISTICS RX Packets TX Packets RX MB Tx MR Business Central Wireless Manager Application VW743 35 F80D00 Healthy 28d 9h 9m 00 26 F2 F8 0D 08 00 26 F2 F8 0D 00 00 26 F2 F8 0D 10 United States 2 19 20 0 29210150001D6 172 16 70 128 255 255 224 0 172 16 64 1 04 02 2015 PDT 04 02 2015 PDT WNDAP350 location2 US Pacific 2 45 Yes 10 Minutes 196511503 5107043 3182 1719 08 59 20PM 05 04 2015 PDT 08 59 29
250. mary of statistics for an access point over a monitoring period that you can customize The summary of statistics includes an overview of the various types of clients and traffic in the network the network health and the top talkers clients in the WiFi network To view the summary of statistics for an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Access Points icon All access points assigned to the location display To select the access point do one of the following e If only a few access points are assigned to the location on the main page click the access point configuration e If many access points are assigned to the location and you know the building and floor to which the access point is assigned do the following a In the MONITORING tree click the building and then the floor b In the MONITORING tree click the access point e If many access points are assigned to the application and you do not know the building and floor do the following a On the main page use the icons amp m below the Cho
251. me Paid vs Free Sunday Paid mfree gt Details The page displays trend graphs for the connected time for both paid and free captive portal access The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days 9 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right t st7 days You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days 10 To view details point to a graph 11 To view only paid access remove the free access trend from the graph by clicking the blue Free button once Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 221 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 12 To view only free access remove the paid access trend from the graph by clicking the red Paid button once 13 To view other aspects of the hotspot usage and adjust the graph take one of the following actions e To view the number of paid devices versus free devices from the menu on the upper right select Number of Devices Paid vs Free e To view the traffic in bytes of paid devices versus free devices from the menu on the upper right select Traffic bytes Paid vs Free By default the graph show the connected time of devices with paid access versus the connected time of devices with free access 14 To view details about hotspot users click the Details heading Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v Trend PDT Details No Identifier SSID Location
252. n The access point is removed from the application and returns to factory default settings Open another browser on your computer In the address bar enter the IP address of the access point In the unlikely situation that the access point is no longer connected to a DHCP server or is accessible only over its default IP address do the following a Change the IP address of your computer to an IP address in the 192 168 0 x subnet which is the subnet in which the access point s default IP address is located For example change the computer s IP address to 192 168 0 210 b Connect your computer to the access point with an Ethernet cable In the address bar of the browser enter the default IP address of the access point e WNAP210v2 192 168 0 236 e WNAP320 192 168 0 100 e WNDAP350 192 168 0 237 e WNDAP360 192 168 0 100 e WNDAP660 192 168 0 100 A login window opens Enter the user name and password The user name is admin The default password is password Click the LOGIN button Either the General page displays or depending on the firmware version that is loaded onto the access point the Change Password page displays in which case you must specify a new password Cloud Managed Access Points 283 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 8 Only if the Change Password page displays To specify a new password do the following a Inthe Current Password field enter password which is the default password b In
253. n page 74 To specify the management VLAN settings for an access point 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name 5 To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons Q m below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information 6 On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point 7 Scroll down and click the IP Settings heading The IP and VLAN settings display 8 To configure the VLAN settings for a static IP address settings from the IP Setting menu select Static 9 To change the management VLAN in the Management VLAN field enter a new VLAN ID By default the management VLAN ID is 1 10 To change or di
254. n system and the hotspot does not provide data encryption For information about how to change the network authentication data encryption and other network settings for the hotspot see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 Change a Hotspot A hotspot is a WiFi network that provides access through a captive portal For information about changing the WiFi network setting for the hotspot see Manage the WiFi Settings for a Network on page 68 For information about changing the captive portal profile that the hotspot uses see Change a Captive Portal Profile on page 125 Remove a Hotspot A hotspot is a WiFi network that provides access through a captive portal For information about removing the WiFi network that includes the hotspot see Remove a WiFi Network from a Location on page 78 For information about removing the captive portal profile that the hotspot uses see Remove a Captive Portal Profile on page 126 You first must disassociate the captive portal profile from the hotspot before you can remove the captive portal profile Manage Hotspots for Locations 178 Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account If you are assigned a hotspot clerk user account you can sell and generate vouchers and view the status of vouchers This chapter includes the following sections e Accept an Invitation and Sign Up for and Activate a Hotspot Clerk Account e Sell and Generate a Voucher e View the Status of Vouch
255. n to the access point and automatically reboot the access point again 12 To view other details about the access point on the main page click another section heading for example IP Setting For information about how to change the access point settings see Manage the Settings for an Access Point on a Floor on page 49 Manage the Settings for an Access Point on a Floor When you change the settings for an access point on a floor the settings apply only to that specific access point gt To manage the settings for an access point on a floor 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 49 10 11 12 13 14 15 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click a location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree click the Access Points heading The buildings at the location display In the LOCATIONS tree click the building that contains the floor with the access point The floors at the building display In the LOCATIONS tree click the floor that contains the access point The access points at the floor display Click the access point The Access
256. ne hour that is the last hour to 30 days 6 To see details about an event do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the event or click any field in any column for the event b To close the event details click the triangle or field again 7 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom 8 To sort the table click a table header 9 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table 10 To mark all entries in the table as read from the Choose Action menu select Mark as Read None of the entries in the table are highlighted and the number on the mailbox in the upper right of the page is cleared Welcome Bob Johnson 2 Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 271 Manage Application Licenses and 1 3 Tokens You can view license information add a license and deregister a license This chapter includes the following sections About the Trial Period e License Concepts Add a License to a Trial Subscription View Licenses or Add a License to an Account
257. nected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Source AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP 0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 AP E0 91 F5 14 6A 48 ADADA AAAA AA Severity Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Mer period for the cleared alarms as Last 30 Days Alarm Time PDT 02 03 20PM 04 16 2015 01 33 56PM 04 16 2015 01 06 11PM 04 16 2015 12 51 16PM 04 16 2015 12 30 43PM 04 16 2015 11 24 53AM 04 16 2015 03 40 32PM 04 15 2015 11 58 29AM 04 15 2015 11 29 35AM 04 15 2015 11 59 16PM 04 14 2015 02 31 16PM 04 14 2015 01 16 54PM 04 14 2015 11 36 00AM 04 14 2015 12 54 08AM 04 14 2015 11 17 11PM 04 13 2015 08 44 02PM 04 13 2015 san Ar rane mainainnar To select which columns are shown in the table do the following Right click anywhere in the table header a To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 20 You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days or you Select the check boxes for the columns th
258. ness Central Wireless Manager Application 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6 On the main page click the Wireless Radio heading v Wireless Radio Radio On Off Setting 2 4GHz Radio Scheduled 5GHz Radio Scheduled Schedule Profile Weekdays 2 4GHz configuration Wireless Mode 11b 11bg 11ng Channel Width 20MHz Show Advanced Features 5GHz configuration Wireless Mode 11a 11na Channel Width Dynamic 20 40 MHz Show Advanced Features The previous figure show both radios scheduled By default the radio or radios are in the Always ON state and the Schedule Profile menu does not display 7 Configure the 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz settings as described in the following table Setting Description Radio On Off Setting 2 4GHz Radio Make a selection from the menu Always ON The 2 4 GHz radio is always on This is the default setting Always OFF The 2 4 GHz radio is always off Scheduled Both the 2 4 GHz radio and the 5 GHz radio turn on and off according to a schedule The Schedule Profile menu becomes available allowing you to select a schedule The schedule that you select applies to both radios 5GHz Radio Make a selection from the menu e Always ON The 5 GHz radio is a
259. ness Central Wireless Manager Application In the MONITORING tree on the left click the location location2 Statistics jal HEALTH Current Network Health Managed Access Points All ACCESSPOINT STATUS CONNECTED HEALTH Health VW743 35 F80D00 Connected 99 Critical Usage 0 VW614 35 86F788 Connected Critical ba APs down Security out of 32 VW612 35 334408 Connected Critical gt Eq Wireless Networks VW611 35 0AFC48 Connected Healthy gt Access Points VW632 35 0CDF00 Connected Critical gt sri homeAP _euw wo VW742 35 431208 Connected Healthy Alarms raised over Last 7 Days VW741 35 0B07E8 Connected a Critical VW734 35 13E808 Connected 9 Critical USAGE SECURITY All 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Trend of Traffic and Clients over Last 7 Days PDT All 2 4 GHz 5 GHz 350 88 Users connected now over Last 7 Days 350 Friday Saturday Sunday Monday TuesdayWednesdayThursday 0 Rogue APs Users over Last 7 Days p 2 4GHz Chents M24GHZTraffic SGHzClents W SGHz Traffic over Last 7 Days The page displays the health for the network and its associated cloud managed access points network usage trend of traffic and clients for the network and network security The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days Note For information about alarms see Location Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for a Location on page 240 To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right tst7 ays You can sel
260. nother monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 20 You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days To see details about an event do the following a Click the triangle at the left of the event or click any field in any column for the event b To close the event details click the triangle or field again To view more of the Date PDT column move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the event log as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Event Log link and follow the directions of your browser To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available View and Manage Alarms and Events 239 Business Central Wireless Manager Application b Type information in the search field If a match is found the results display in the table Location Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for a Location You can view the active alarms for a location acknowledge the alarms and clear the alarms You can also view the cleared alarms and event l
261. nt You can search the hotspot database for your account on the following components each of which comes with a WiFi network requirement e Client MAC address A WiFi network must be set up as a click through hotspot or a voucher hotspot with limited free access that requires the user to click through Email address A WiFi network must be set up as a click through hotspot for which an email address is required or a voucher hotspot with limited free access that requires the user to click through with an email address e User name A captive portal for cloud AAA authentication must be assigned to a WiFi network A hotspot user must sign in with a user name and password Voucher ID The WiFi network must be set up as voucher hotspot gt To search the hotspot database for user activity for your account 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 194 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Select Hotspot Users gt User Activity Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details al By default no data is shown on the page The previo
262. ntral Wireless Manager 15 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Determine the Management VLAN To enable all access points at a location to connect over the Internet to the cloud make sure that the management VLAN is set up correctly at the location and that all access points at the location use the same management VLAN Plan the Client Authentication and Data Encryption A WiFi user must authenticate to the WiFi network to be able to access WiFi resources A WiFi network can supports several types of security methods including those methods that require a RADIUS authentication server The encryption option that is available depends on the authentication method that you selected The following table lists the authentication and corresponding encryption methods that you configure through the application Table 1 Authentication and encryption options Authentication Method Type of Authentication Encryption Options Authentication Server Open System None None WEP Open System None for authentication 64 bit 128 bit or 152 bit WEP but you must add a network key passphrase for encryption WEP Shared Key Network key 64 bit 128 bit or 152 bit WEP None passphrase Legacy 802 1x RADIUS None RADIUS server WPA PSK Network key TKIP or TKIP AES passphrase WPA2 PSK Network key AES or TKIP AES None passphrase WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Network key TKIP AES None passphrase WPA with RADIUS RAD
263. o set up a hotspot for these scenarios are almost identical The only difference is the menu from which you initiate the hotspot wizard This chapter describes how to add a hotspot directly to a location The application provides three methods of user access and authentication for a hotspot click through click through with email and voucher authentication Note You cannot directly set up a hotspot with cloud AAA authentication through the hotspot wizard but you can do so indirectly by assigning a captive portal that uses cloud AAA authentication to a WiFi network That means that if you want to set up a hotspot with cloud AAA authentication you must configure the hotspot through the captive portal menus For more information see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 111 and Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 114 You can set up two types of hotspots each of which can offer free or paid access Basic hotspot A basic hotspot lets you use the default splash page image or upload a custom image align the image and customize the header text and end user license agreement EULA You can assign click through click through using an email address or voucher authentication through two types of basic hotspots Free access A basic hotspot that provides free access by requiring users to click through or click through using an email
264. ocation A basic hotspot with free access lets you use the default splash page image or upload a custom image align the image and customize the header text and end user license agreement EULA For a basic hotspot you cannot customize or restyle the splash page By default a hotspot for free access is an entirely open system that is without network authentication and data encryption You can assign click through without any authentication or click through with email authentication For information about setting up an advanced hotspot with free access see Add an Advanced Hotspot for Free Access on page 159 gt To adda basic hotspot with free WiFi access to a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Note You can click the Add Hotspot link on the Home page in which case the hotspot wizard functions slightly differently from the way it is described in this procedure and includes an extra page that lets you select a location Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location From the Choose Action menu select
265. ocation Profile page displays 6 On the main page click the AP Local Management heading The AP Local Management section expands 7 To display the current password select the Show Characters check box 8 Enter a new secure password The new password applies to all access points that are assigned to the location 9 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Select a RADIUS Server for a Location For you to be able to select a RADIUS server for a location you first must set up a shared RADIUS server profile see Manage RADIUS Server Profiles on page 104 After you select a RADIUS server profile for a location you can assign that profile for network authentication with RADIUS see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 To select a RADIUS server for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6
266. og for a location The following sections describe how you view and manage alarms and events for a location e View and Manage Active Alarms for a Location e View the Cleared Alarms for a Location e View the Event Log for a Location View and Manage Active Alarms for a Location You can view the active alarms for a location acknowledge the alarms and clear the alarms After you clear the alarms you can still view them in the alarm history that is the table with cleared alarms Acknowledging an alarm moves the state to acknowledged Clearing an alarm removes the alarm from the active table and adds the alarm to the cleared alarms table If you do not acknowledge an active alarm the alarm remains in memory unless an event occurs that clears the alarm automatically and adds the alarm to the cleared alarms table The application can display a maximum of 200 active alarms but you can download the entire active alarms table as an Excel or csv file gt To view manage and download active alarms for a location 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Point
267. om login message custom error message custom success message or custom EULA click the associated PREVIEW button in the HTML section To add the captive portal profile click the ADD WITH ADVANCED MODE button The Captive Portal Profile page displays the profile Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 116 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note For information about how to assign a captive portal profile to a hotspot for a location or WiFi network see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers A basic captive portal profile for voucher access lets you use the default splash page image or upload a custom image align the image and customize the header text and end user license agreement EULA For a basic captive portal profile you cannot customize or restyle the splash page In addition to access that is paid for with a voucher you can also provide limited free access For information about adding an advanced captive portal profile for voucher access see Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 122 To add a basic captive portal profile for voucher access 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home pag
268. on On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point Scroll down and click the Advanced heading The advanced settings displays In the Static Tx Power section configure the transmission output for the 2 4 GHz radio 5 GHz radio or both e 2 4 GHz band Select the 2 4GHz check box and from the menu that becomes available select Half Quarter Eight or Minimum By default the setting for the 2 4 GHz band is Full e 5 GHz band Select the 5GHz check box and from the menu that becomes available select Half Quarter Eight or Minimum By default the setting for the 5 GHz band is Full Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage Access Points at a Location 91 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage the Syslog Settings for an Access Point If your network includes a syslog server you can configure an access point to send its logs to the server To manage the syslog settings for an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations
269. on You can set up multiple locations each with its own networks and access points and manage them from the application By default an account with a free trial subscription or paid for subscription can support up to 4 000 access points Service Location Concepts Service locations in this manual referred to simply as ocations are physical addresses where WiFi networks and access points are installed In the application these locations are logical locations and can span multiple Layer 2 or Layer 3 network segments When you set up a location with one or more networks and assign access points to that location the application automatically assigns the networks to the pool of access points for that location That is you do not assign a network to an access point The application assigns the network automatically to one or more access points depending on the number of networks and the number of access points at the location When you set up a location the application automatically creates a default building and floor for the location You can add multiple buildings and floors to the location In the application these buildings and floors are logical groupings and although they can they do not need to correspond to physical locations or network segments You assign an access point to a building or to a specific floor in a building You can add multiple locations for example for branches and remote offices which can be in different
270. on Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays Select Cleared Alarms Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v Download Full Cleared Alarms Title Source ee Location Name Severity Firmware upgrade failed AP disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly Disconnected unexpectedly AP VW734 35 13E808 AP E0 91 F5 0A F2 AP 20 4E 7F 86 FB 48 AP 20 4E 7F 86 FB A8 AP 20 4E 7F 86 E0 E8 AP 20 4E 7F 86 F7 88 AP 30 46 9A 1A F 8 88 AP 00 26 F2 F7 D8 88 AP 30 46 9A 0C DF 08 AP 0 91 F5 0A F5 C8 AP E0 91 F5 14 71 88 AP 0 91 F5 0A FA A8 AP 20 4E 7F 42 D7 08 AP E0 91 F5 0A F2 88 location2 sri homeAP location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical location2 OIO OIO OIO oocoog geose soc oo Disconnected unexpectedly AP E0 91 F5 0A F6 C8
271. on menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click the access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point Scroll down and click the IP Settings heading The IP address displays Take note of the IP address which you will need in Step 4 To view the password of the access point in the application do the following a Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location to which the access point is assigned The Location Profile page displays On the main page click the AP Local Management heading The AP Local Management section expands To display the current password select the Show Characters check box Take note of the password which you will need in Step 5 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter the IP address of the access point Enter the user name and password The user name is admin The password is specific to the location to which the access point is assigned see Step 2 Click the LOGIN button The General page displays The web management interface is the restricted cloud management interface Cloud Managed Access Points 281 Business Central Wireless Manager Application When the access point is cloud enabled the web management interface can in
272. on pop up window displays Click the YES button The access point is removed and returns to factory default settings For information about returning an access point to standalone mode see Convert an Access Point from Cloud Enabled Mode to Standalone Mode on page 282 Add Multiple Access Points Simultaneously You can add multiple access points to the application Before you can add multiple access points to the application simultaneously you must add the serial numbers and names to a table ina csv file In the table add the serial numbers in the leftmost column and add the names in the column immediately to the right of it The table can contain a header but does not need to The following figure shows an example of a table with a header Tip You can download a template from the application You use this template to set up your list of serial numbers and names For more information see the following procedure Manage Access Points at a Location 94 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Name Charm Strange Top Flute Waterbowl GarysHotspot NTGHotel1 NTGHotel2 NTGHotel3 GGhhpO NETGEAR116259 netgear677810 netgear467823 Figure 2 Table with serial number and names of access points AN CAUTION Do not open the csv file with serial numbers and names in Excel Excel might automatically reformat the serial numbers in scientific notation Make sure that the column with serial numbers in the csv file
273. ork Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles 104 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add a RADIUS Server Profile with an Optional Accounting Server If one or more RADIUS servers are available in your network you can set up a RADIUS server profile that can include up to two authentication servers and up to two accounting servers You can set up multiple RADIUS server profiles To add a RADIUS server profile T 2 6 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays From the Choose Action menu select Add Radius Server Profile Add Radius Server Profile Profile Name Primary Authentication Server IP Address Port Number 1812 Shared Secret eecccccccces Secondary Authentication Server IP Address Port Number 1812 Shared Secret Poccccccooes Authentication Setting Reauthentication Time seconds Update global key every seconds Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Profile Name Enter a name that lets you easily identify the RADIUS server Primary Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the primary RADIUS serve
274. ose Action menu to search for the access point b On the main page click the access point configuration Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 226 Business Central Wireless Manager Application location2 Statistics VW611 35 0AFC48 Profile MONTTORNG Summary Clients Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log ja State CONNECTED Clients Connected Now 35 Alarms 0O OG All CONNECTED 99 gt 9 location2 Total Clients and Traffic PDT Network Total Health 100 MB Usage Security gt Eq Wireless Networks gt Access Points fia Building 1 gt E Floor 1 SS vw611 35 Trend of Blacklisted Clients PDT No Blacklisted Clients The page displays the state of the access point CONNECTED the number of connected clients and the number of alarms for the access point For more information see the following section and appendix For more information about access point states see Appendix A Cloud Managed Access Points e For more information about alarms see Access Point Level View and Manage Alarms and Events for an Access Point on page 248 The page also displays a graph that shows the connection time in percentages a graph for the total number of clients and amount of traffic on the WiFi networks that are configured on the access point a graph that shows the trend of alarms for the access point and a graph that shows the trend of blacklisted clients none in the previo
275. ot connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 75 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the WiFi Network into a Captive Portal by Assigning a Captive Portal Profile After you set up a WiFi network you can change it into a captive portal Although you can build an entirely new captive portal for the WiFi network the easiest approach is to assign an existing captive portal profile to the network For information about how to set up a captive portal profile see Manage Captive Portal Profiles on page 109 To assign a captive portal to a WiFi network 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location 6 In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display 7 Click the network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section displays 8 Click the Captive Portal
276. ou easily identify the user Email Address To be able to email the voucher to the user enter the email address of the user Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 182 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Voucher plan Only the first voucher plan is available Note Ina future release of the application an admin user might be able to configure alternate voucher plans after which the hotspot clerk would be able to select such a plan for use in a voucher Forced Expiration By default the voucher does not expire and the NO bution is selected To let the voucher expire for example at the expected checkout time of a hotel guest do the following 1 Select the YES button 2 From the menu select the expiration time 3 From the calendar that opens when you click the date field select the expiration date 9 In the gray bar the bottom specify the number of hours for each voucher and the number of vouchers e From the connected hour counter select the number of hours that the voucher must include Note As a hotspot clerk you cannot change the hourly price Only a user with an admin user account can changed the hourly price e From the each counter select the number of vouchers that you are selling 10 Click the GENERATE button The voucher or vouchers are generated The following figures show samples of vouchers Network Name HotelGuests
277. ow Location All Location Access Point Name Started Date Completed Date No of Retry netgear137ABs Upgraded 04 22 15 04 22 15 If the application manages different access point models repeat the procedure for all access point models Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 263 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Automate Firmware Upgrades for Cloud Managed Access Points By default the application automatically pushes the new firmware to the access points seven days after the firmware is made available If you changed to a scheduled firmware update you can return to an automated update gt To automate firmware upgrades for cloud managed access points 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left select Settings gt Schedule Firmware By default the selection from the Firmware Upgrade menu is Notify Me From the Firmware Upgrade menu select Notify Me Click the SAVE button The changes are saved If new firmware is available a message similar to the following one displays above the main menu bar Manage the Application Users As an admin user you can add application users to the user pool
278. pa2 a10loctnet1 open a10loctnet1 open ARANETA OM ET AULIA TERE gt onsale A 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 11 45 46AM 05 28 44 4D AC AMA ATIAN The page displays information about all WiFi clients that are or were connected to networks at the location The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days To select which columns are shown in the table do the following a To the right of the MAC Address column right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right 709s You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days For this table you can also select Right Now to display only the clients that are currently connected To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To download the access points table as an Excel or csv file click the Download Full Details link and follow the directions of yo
279. password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons a below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point In the Name field enter a new name for the access point Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Configure a Static IP Address for an Access Point By default cloud managed access points receive their IP addresses through a DHCP server However you can configure a static IP address for an access point gt To configure a static IP address for an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page di
280. please enter your purchased voucher ID You can customize this text If you do offer free access with the voucher the default text that displays on the splash page is To access Internet please enter your purchased voucher ID or continue with limited free access You can also customize this text To preview the splash page click the PREVIEW button The fields and buttons that the splash page displays depend on whether you offer free access with the voucher You cannot customize these fields or buttons e No Optional Access The splash page shows the default text or your customized text a field in which the user must enter the voucher number and the Submit button that the user must click to obtain paid access Click Through The splash page shows the default text or your customized text a field in which the user must enter the voucher number and the Submit button that the user must click to obtain paid access In addition the splash page shows the Continue button that the user must click to obtain a limited period of free access Click Through With Email The splash page shows the default text or your customized text a field in which the user must enter the voucher number and the Submit button that the user must click to obtain paid access In addition the splash page shows a field in which the user must enter an email address and the Continue button that the user must click to obtain a limited period of free access EU
281. plication Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the access point push the configuration to the access point and automatically reboot the access point again h To view other details about the access point on the main page click another section heading for example IP Setting For information about how to change the access point settings see Manage Access Point Settings on page 85 i To verify that another newly added access point is connected to the cloud repeat Step g and Step h Set Up a Basic Location The following procedure describes how you can set up a basic location add a single WiFi network and add a single access point after the Get Started wizard is no longer available to you gt To set up a basic location add a WiFi network and add an access point 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration tcl sone a ee ee e All Locations Choose Action Add Location C in y E o nad Radio Schedule Add Captive Portal Profile SunnyMount
282. pop up window displays confirming the addition 17 Click the OK button The configurations for the access points that you just added display 18 To verify that an access point is connected to the cloud and as an option assign the access point to a location do the following a To view only unassigned access points including the access points that you just added through the csv file in the INVENTORY tree on the left click Unassigned b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons Q m below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information c On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point v Access Point Profile Name netgearl37EE8 Serial Number 29210A5W000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F 7 17 7E E7 Location Time Since Power Up 04 9h 48m Nams ooo Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the application detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting fo
283. pplication 5 Select Active Alarms Summary AP Details Active Alarms The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring Download Full Active Alarms a Acknowledged Cleared Alarms Title Event Log Hotspot Users v Source Location Na Lss 2 ____ fs Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed AP VW734 35 13E808 AP VW643 35 86E0E8 AP VW612 35 334408 AP VW741 35 0B07E8 AP VW724 35 86F 508 AP VW614 35 86F788 AP VW732 35 0AF6C8 AP VW633 35 1AD5C8 AP VW721 35 0AF5C8 AP VW632 35 0CDF00 AP VW714 35 86F728 AP VW641 35 0AF288 AP VW644 35 86EA68 AP VW634 35 86E568 AP VW733 35 146C68 A nein Re en nan period for the active alarms as Last 30 Days location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 location2 6 To select which columns are shown in the table do the following Right click anywhere in the table header a A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts 7 To select
284. pplication By default a hotspot for free access is an entirely open system that is without network authentication and data encryption You can assign click through without any authentication or click through with email authentication For information about setting up a basic hotspot with free access see Add a Basic Hotspot for Free Access on page 154 To add a basic hotspot with free WiFi access to a location or individual WiFi network 1 2 T Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Note You can click the Add Hotspot link on the Home page in which case the hotspot wizard functions slightly differently from the way it is described in this procedure and includes an extra page that lets you select a location Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location From the Choose Action menu select Add Hotspot Free Add Hotspot Add Hotspot Network Enter a name for your hotspot and select which radio bands to make this hotspot available The entered name will be used as the SSID name that users will connect to This network w
285. pplication Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v Trend PDT Details No Identifier Location MAC DD1E15D6 SunnyMountainResort 60 34 4B 28 9A 22 1B1829E7 SunnyMountainResort 60 33 33 28 9A 82 12 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right 13 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous figure 14 To sort the table click a table header 15 To view more details about one individual hotspot user click the ID in the Identifier column Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 193 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms EventLog Hotspot Users Hotspot usage details OD1E15D6 al Summary General Usage Identifier DD1E15D6 Total Tx Bytes 106 81 MB SSID GolfWeek Total Rx Bytes 28 97 MB Location SunnyMountainResort Total of Sessions 1 Current Connection State Disconnected Total Purchase 12 First Connected time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Remaining Time 0d 11h 33m Last Connected Time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Expiration date N A Total Connected Time 0d 0h 26m Trend PDT Details By default the summary for the hotspot user displays 16 To view the trend or the details for the hotspot user click the Trend PDT or Details heading respectively Search the Hotspot Database for Your Accou
286. r Port Number Enter the port number through which the application must reach the primary RADIUS server Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles 105 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Setting Description Shared Secret Enter the password that provides the application access to the primary RADIUS server Secondary Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the secondary RADIUS server Port Number Enter the port number through which the application must reach the secondary RADIUS server Shared Secret Enter the password that provides the application access to the secondary RADIUS server Authentication Setting Reauthentication Time Enter the period in seconds after which a user must be reauthenticated The default period is 3600 seconds 1 hour Enter 0 to disable reauthentication Update global key every To allow the global key update select the Update global key every check box and enter the period in seconds after which the global key must be updated The default period is 1800 seconds 30 minutes 7 Click the ADD THIS RADIUS PROFILE button The application confirms the addition 8 To add an accounting server to the profile click the Add Accounting Server link and do the following a For the primary and secondary accounting servers specify the IP address port number and shared secret b Click the ADD THIS ACCOUNTING SERVER b
287. r e Click through with email Copy from existing captive e Click through Voucher portal e Click through with email Use existing captive portal Click through Voucher Redirect users e Click through with email Redirecting to a website is an option Redirecting to a website is an option Voucher definition Not applicable e Set the unit cost per hour e Offer optional free access in addition to paid access e Authenticate optional free access Click through Click through with email Splash page Basic You can set the following options You can set the following options e Image for the page e Image for the page Alignment of the image e Alignment of the image e Header for the page e Header for the page e Text for the page e Text for the page e EULA text and whether the e EULA text and whether the EULA displays EULA displays Advanced You can customize and restyle the You can customize and restyle the splash page by uploading a splash page file page styling with CSS is supported Customization includes the following options e Login message e Login error message e Login success message e EULA splash page by uploading a splash page file page styling with CSS is supported Customization includes the following options e Login message e Login error message e Login success message e EULA Manage Hotspots for Locations 152 Business Central Wireless Manager Applicat
288. r accounts from a user group 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays From the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select User Groups The All User Groups page displays Click the user group The User Group page displays Select the check boxes for the user accounts Click the DELETE SELECTED button A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The hotspot user accounts are removed from the user group but not from the hotspot user database Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 141 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the Group Name or Usage Plan for a User Group You can change the group name or usage plan for a user group To change the group name and usage plan for a user group 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select User Groups The All User Groups page displays Click th
289. r connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Manage Access Points at a Location 98 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note Be aware that if the access point connects to the application for the first time it might take between 5 and 10 minutes before the State field displays Connected During this period the application might need to push the latest firmware to the access point automatically reboot the access point push the configuration to the access point and automatically reboot the access point again Note You can either assign the access points now see Step d through Step h or do this later see Assign an Access Point to a Location on page 84 d From the Location menu select a location The Building menu and Floor menu become available e From the Building menu select a building for the location If you did not add a building to the location the menu lists Building1 as the default setting f From the Floor menu select a floor for the building If you did not add a floor to the building the menu lists Floor 1 as the default setting g Click the APPLY button A confirmation pop up window displays h Click the YES button The changes are saved 19 To verify if another access point is connected to the cloud and as an option assign the access point to a location repeat Step 78 View or Change
290. r name and click the right arrow The user name displays in the Users in Group column To move more user accounts to the group repeat the previous step c To move a user account back to the Users Not In Group column select the user name and click the left arrow 9 Click the SAVE button The existing hotspot user accounts are added to the user group Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 139 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change a Hotspot User Account in a User Group You can change the settings for a hotspot user account You must know to which user group the hotspot user account is assigned Note Changes to the hotspot user account in the user group also affect the hotspot user account in the hotspot user database Tip If you are not sure to which user group the hotspot user account is assigned locate the hotspot user account in the hotspot user database see View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account on page 131 If you change a hotspot user account in the hotspot user database you can also assign the hotspot user account to another user group For more information see Change an Existing Hotspot User Account on page 133 gt To change the settings for a hotspot user account in a user group 1 2 10 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email
291. re based wireless controller platform or manually reconfigure them for standalone service Note During the a free trial period you can provision an access point for a single BCWM account only You cannot reprovision the same access point for another BCWM account that is you cannot set up successive accounts with trial subscriptions and keep adding the same access points to different accounts If you do not convert a BCWM account from a trial subscription to a paid for subscription 30 days after the end of the grace period the BCWM account is deleted License Concepts A license consists of tokens Each access point that the application manages requires one token per month That is each token provides one access point with one month of cloud usage After all tokens are used up the licence must be renewed for you to continue to use the application For example if your license consists of 2 000 tokens and the application manages 33 access points per month you must renew your license after five years Another example If your license consists of 2 000 tokens and the application manages 80 access points per month you must renew your license after two years and one month Manage Application Licenses and Tokens 274 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add a License to a Trial Subscription Ensure that your account with a trial subscription does not expire by adding a license However even if your account expires NET
292. re not displayed onscreen Except for debug events events are automatically cleared after 30 days Debug events are automatically cleared after 7 days gt To view and download the event log for a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays View and Manage Alarms and Events 244 10 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display In the MONITORING tree click the Health icon The health summary page for the location displays Select Event Log Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Command Log Event Log Download Full Event Log Title Source Severity Date PDT lt r Auto RF Successful Location location2 Warning 12 03 56AM osovi Auto RF Successful Location location2 Warning 12 03 28AM 05 06 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 05 09AM 05 05 Auto RF Successful Warning 11 58 44PM 05 03 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 03 38AM 05 03 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 00 31AM 05 02 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 05 24AM 05 01 Auto RF Successful Warning 12 00 14AM 04 30 Location locat
293. ree on the left click the location where the hotspot is set up All hotspots at that location display SunnyMountainResort Expand all LQ GolfCourse 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz All 9 Corporate HotelGuests 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz 9 SunnyMountainRes a GolfCourse GolfWeek 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz HotelGuests we GolfWeek To display detailed information about each hotspot click the Expand all link Information about access pricing and security displays Click the hotspot for which you want to sell a voucher Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account 181 7 Business Central Wireless Manager Application eT nny MountainResort HotelGuests La No free access available at this network All 9 Corporate Premium access plans available Guests SunnyMountainRes 2 00 Per connected hour we GolfCourse Usage Limits Unlimited we HotelGuests w GolfWeek Click the SELL VOUCHER button SunnyMountainResort HotelGuests J 5 CANCEL GENERATE Customer information Name Email a copy of the voucher to customer Email Address Voucher Unit Per connected hour Usage Limits Unit Cost 2 00 Usage Limits Unlimited Additional Time Controls Forced Expiration NC 10 01PM He 06 05 2015 1 E3 connectednour 200 J eachx 1 FE voucher s Total 2 00 Configure the settings as described in the following table Setting Description Name Enter the full name of the user or a name that lets y
294. rmware version before you can upgrade the access point to the required cloud enabled firmware version Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 19 Business Central Wireless Manager Application AN CAUTION If you do not first upgrade to the minimum required standalone firmware version but attempt to upgrade directly to the required cloud enabled firmware version you might be locked out of the access point In that situation you must log in to the access point over an SSH connection with the user name admin and the password that is configured for the access point and issue the restore factory default command to reset the access point to factory default settings If your access point runs the minimum required standalone firmware version you must load the required cloud enabled firmware version onto the access point Using the web management interface of the access point upgrade the access point to the cloud enabled firmware version and reset the access point to factory default settings For more information about preparing your access points for cloud management see the NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager Quick Start Guide which you can download from downloadcenter netgear com Once you perform the one time cloud enabled firmware upgrade for the access point the application can centrally manage future firmware upgrades for the cloud managed access point Note For more information about cloud managed acces
295. rofile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA e Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers e Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers e Change a Captive Portal Profile e Remove a Captive Portal Profile Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 110 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA A basic captive portal profile for free access or access through cloud AAA lets you use the default splash page image or upload a custom image align the image and customize the header text and end user license agreement EULA For a basic captive portal profile you cannot customize or restyle the splash page You can assign click through click through with email or cloud AAA authentication For information about adding an advanced captive portal profile for free access or access through cloud AAA see Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA on page 114 To add a basic captive portal profile for free access or access through cloud AAA 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 Fro
296. rough Step e for each floor and access point that you added Note If you must set up more than one building at the location repeat the entire procedure for each building Get Started With Cloud Management 39 Manage Locations Buildings and Floors Locations form the key building blocks of your cloud network You can set up new and manage existing locations manage buildings and floors at a location manage WiFi and global settings for a location and manage hotspots for a location This chapter includes the following sections Add a New Location Copy the Configuration of One Location and Overwrite the Configuration of Another Location Change the Basic Settings for a Location Profile Remove a Location Manage Buildings and Floors for a Location Manage WiFi and Global Settings for a Location Note For information about managing hotspots for locations see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations 40 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Add a New Location You can add a location only that is one without a WiFi network access point and default building and floor For information about setting up a location with those components see Set Up a Basic Location on page 29 gt To add anew location 1 2 6 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM acco
297. rowser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Radius Server Profiles The All Radius Server Profiles page displays Click the RADIUS server profile The Radius Server Profile page displays From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Radius Server A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The RADIUS server profile is removed Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles 107 Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access Captive portal profiles user groups hotspot user accounts and MAC ACLs are part of the shared settings which you can assign to any location or network depending on the nature of the setting Usage plans are also part of the shared settings At any location you can assign a usage plan to a captive portal profile hotspot user group or user account This chapter includes the following sections Manage Captive Portal Profiles Manage Usage Plans Manage Hotspot User Accounts for Cloud AAA Hotspots Manage User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots Manage MAC ACLs 108 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Manage Captive Portal Profiles A captive port
298. s EventLog Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details al By default no data is shown on the page The previous figure shows the period over which a search occurs as Last 7 Days 9 To select another search period click the clock icon at the right t st7 bays You can select a search period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days 10 In the Hotspot usage details field enter all or part of a client MAC address email address user name or voucher ID What you can enter as search criteria depends on the type of WiFi network that you set up for the hotspot see the introduction of this section 11 Click the magnifier icon Summary Clients EventLog Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details DD al Search Result No Identifier SSID Location Authentication Typ DD1E15D6 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort Voucher The previous figure shows part of a voucher ID in the Hotspot usage details field which yields a single hotspot user with a voucher ID that starts with the specified search criterium A search could yield several hotspot users Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 224 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 12 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous image 13 To sort the table click a table header 14 To view more details about one individual hotspot user do the following a Click the user row
299. s Manager Application Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v Trend PDT Details No Identifier SSID Location MAC DD1E15D6 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort 60 34 4B 28 9A 22 1B1829E7 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort 60 33 33 28 9A 82 14 To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right 15 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous figure 16 To sort the table click a table header 17 To view more details about one individual hotspot user click the ID in the Identifier column Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 210 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary Client Details Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details OD1E15D6 al CANCEL Summary General Usage Identifier DD1E15D6 Total Tx Bytes 106 81 MB SSID GolfWeek Total Rx Bytes 28 97 MB Location SunnyMountainResort Total of Sessions 1 Current Connection State Disconnected Total Purchase 12 First Connected time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Remaining Time 0d 11h 33m Last Connected Time 02 24 16PM 04 30 2015 PDT Expiration date N A Total Connected Time 0d 0h 26m Trend PDT Details By default the summary for the hotspot user displays 18 To view the trend or the details for the hotspot user click the Trend PDT or Details heading respectively Search the Hotspot Database for a Location You can search the hotspot
300. s for an access point acknowledge the alarms and clear the alarms After you clear the alarms you can still view them in the alarm history that is the cleared alarms table Acknowledging an alarm moves the state to acknowledged Clearing an alarm removes the alarm from the active table and adds the alarm to the cleared alarms table If you do not acknowledge an active alarm the alarm remains in memory unless an event occurs that clears the alarm automatically and adds the alarm to the cleared alarms table The application can display a maximum of 200 active alarms but you can download the entire active alarms table as an Excel or csv file gt To view manage and download active alarms for an access point 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays View and Manage Alarms and Events 248 Business Central Wireless Manager Application In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Access Points icon All access points assigned to the location display To select the access point do one of the following e If only a few access points are assigned to the location
301. s how often synchronization occurs By default the beacon interval is 100 ms To select another beacon interval enter a number from 100 to 1000 ms in the field DTIM interval The delivery traffic indication message DTIM interval also referred to as the data beacon rate indicates the beacon DTIM period in multiples of beacon intervals By default the DTIM interval is 3 To select another DTIM interval enter a number from 1 to 255 in the field 8 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage Load Balancing for Access Points at a Location All networks configured at a location are automatically applied to all access points at that location and therefore to all available radios at that location Typically a single access point can support eight networks per radio If an access point supports only a single radio the application configures the networks only on that radio By default each access point supports the maximum number of clients that it is capable of When you balance the client load over different types of access points at a location take considerations such as the following into account The total number of access points at the location The types of access points at the
302. s icons display View and Manage Alarms and Events 240 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 6 In the MONITORING tree click the Health icon The health summary page for the location displays 7 Select Active Alarms Summary AP Details Download Full Active Alarms a Acknowledged Title Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Command Log Event Log Source Severity Uiks M Te No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed Firmware upgrade failed AP VW643 35 86E0E8 AP VW612 35 334408 AP VW741 35 0B07E8 AP VW724 35 86F 508 AP VW614 35 86F 788 AP VW732 35 0AF6C8 AP VW633 35 1AD5C8 AP VW721 35 0AF5C8 AP VW632 35 0CDF00 AP VW714 35 86F 728 AP VW641 35 0AF288 AP VW644 35 86EA68 AP VW634 35 86E568 AP VW733 35 146C68 AP VW622 35 F7D880 A RAR AR inmana Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical The columns in the table are self explanatory The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the active alarms as Last 30 D
303. s point push the configuration to the access point and automatically reboot the access point again j To view other details about the access point on the main page click another section heading for example IP Setting For information about how to change the access point settings see Manage Access Point Settings on page 85 Set Up a Complex Location The following procedure describes how you can set up a complex location with a building multiple floors and multiple access points and add multiple WiFi networks Adding access points is optional You can also do this later The procedure to set up a complex location consists of the following main steps that are described in detail later in this section 1 2 3 Set up a location Add a building to the location Add floors to the building While you add floors you can also add access points or you can add access points later Add WiFi networks to the location Tip Before you set up a complex location see Plan a Location with WiFi Networks and Hotspots on page 15 gt To set up a complex location with a building multiple floors and multiple access points and add multiple WiFi networks T 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration
304. s points see Chapter 5 Manage Access Points at a Location and Appendix A Cloud Managed Access Points Definitions of Access Point Terms This manual uses the following definitions of access point AP terms e Cloud managed AP NETGEAR AP that is installed at a location and is controlled by the application e Unmanaged AP An AP that is not controlled by the application The following APs fall into this category NETGEAR AP that is known NETGEAR AP that is unknown Third party AP that is known Third party AP that is unknown NETGEAR or third party rogue AP e Known AP An AP that is not a cloud managed AP and that an admin user classified as a known AP Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 20 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Rogue AP An illegitimate AP that is not a cloud managed AP and that is broadcasting an SSID that is identical to the SSID of a cloud managed AP and that an admin user could mark as a known AP This type of rogue AP is also referred to as an evil twin Unknown AP An unknown AP that is not a cloud managed AP that is within the radio range of and discovered by a cloud managed AP and that an admin user could mark as a known AP Static AP An AP that is configured with a static channel and a static output power Auto AP An AP that is configured for automatic radio frequency auto RF assignment and automatic output power assignment Introduction to the Business Centra
305. sable the untagged VLAN in the Untagged VLAN field enter a new VLAN ID or clear the Untagged VLAN check box By default the untagged VLAN is enabled with VLAN ID 1 By default the application tests the new VLAN configuration If the access point cannot connect to the Internet with the new VLAN configuration the application automatically rolls back to the previous configuration with which the access point was able to connect to the Internet and raises an alarm In such a situation you are directed to specify if you want to keep the old VLAN configuration or try the new VLAN settings again Even if the access Manage Access Points at a Location 88 Business Central Wireless Manager Application point cannot connect to the Internet with the new VLAN configuration you can force the application to accept the new VLAN configuration 11 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access point Manage the Access Point Antenna Settings Some access points can support one or more optional external antennas For such an access point you can switch the antenna settings from internal antennas to external antennas To switch the antenna settings for an access point to external antennas 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM
306. ser groups are allowed WiFi access in a building and which users are denied WiFi access in a building This feature is useful only if a location includes multiple buildings and you set up user groups see Add a User Group on page 135 gt To assign a user group for hotspot users to a building at a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays On the main page click the Building Access Controls heading The Building Access Controls section displays By default the Disable radio button is selected Select the Enable radio button 1 You cannot directly set up a hotspot with cloud AAA authentication but you can do so indirectly by assigning a captive portal that uses cloud AAA authentication to a WiFi network Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 61 8 10 11 12 Business Central Wireless Manager Application In the Building column select a building If you did not yet specify the building controls all existing user groups display in the Allow column To deny WiFi access to a user group in the building select the user group and click the right
307. ser or hotspot clerk To change the role of an application user 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Account The My Account page displays 5 Inthe ACCOUNT tree on the left click Users All user accounts display By default the accounts are sorted alphabetically 6 If many accounts are set up for the application to narrow the accounts that display use the icons a below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an account to group accounts together according to an attribute or to display more information 7 On the main page click the user account The User Profile section displays information about the account 8 From the Role menu select another role e Admin A user who can configure the application e Read only A user who cannot configure the application but who can view the web configuration interface Hotspot clerk A user who cannot configure the application and who cannot view the web configuration interface but who can sell and print vouchers and view the status of sold vouchers 9 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Change the User Profile Password or Time Zone for Your User Account You can change the user profile first and last name telephone number and
308. sicssasesadcdedadudesos 102 Change Disable or Enable a Radio On Off Schedule 103 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Remove Radio On Off Schedules 0 000 c cece eect e eee 104 Manage RADIUS Server Profiles 00 eee eee eee eens 104 Add a RADIUS Server Profile with an Optional Accounting Server 105 Change a RADIUS Server Profil sss cccascsnastdererewaasadaacaancan 106 Remove a RADIUS Server Profile 20 0 e cece eee eee eee ee 107 Chapter 7 Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access Manage Captive Portal Profiles 0 0 cece eee eee eee 109 Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA c c0c0ses ene Seomimimugnerr severed soeeeeb onthe 111 Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Free Access or Access Through Cloud AAA 65 ccckraninvndnri reese cenbedeses oe oa ed s 114 Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers 117 Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers 122 Change a Captive Portal Profile 0c eee e eee eee 125 Remove a Captive Portal Profile 00 e cece eee eee 126 Manage Usage Plans s cs2ccseteitiotegedated dine fapegaeateseiedasing 127 Adda Usage Pla M cs 2 oes oaoins cg s tepane a On secs 128 Change a Usage Pla Ml fic s cc 0 a eneenpsce da varniodie ant iiitide Ea a 129 Removers Usage Plans sienito edo onokm
309. siness Central Wireless Manager Application You can assign a usage plan to one or more of the following components e Captive portal profile See Manage Captive Portal Profiles on page 109 e Hotspot See Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations e User group See Add a User Group on page 135 e Hotspot user account See View the Hotspot User Database and Add a New Hotspot User Account on page 131 and Add a New Hotspot User Account to a User Group on page 137 The following sections describe how you can set up and manage usage plans e Add a Usage Plan e Change a Usage Plan e Remove a Usage Plan Add a Usage Plan Before you add a usage plan consider how you are going to use it You can assign a usage plan to a captive portal profile hotspot user group or user account To add a usage plan 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Add Usage Plan Add Usage Plan Usage Plan Name Time Limit Devices Allow concurrent connections per username or voucher 6 Inthe Usage Policy Name field enter a name that lets you easily identify the usage plan 7 To configure time limits click the Time Limit heading Time Limit
310. splays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Inventory All access point configurations display By default the configurations are sorted by access point name Manage Access Points at a Location 86 10 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To narrow the access points that display do the following a To view only access points that are assigned to one location in the INVENTORY tree on the left click the location and as an option narrow the access points that display at the location by selecting a building and a floor b If many access points are assigned to the application use the icons amp below the Choose Action menu on the main page to search for an access point to group access points together according to an attribute or to display more information On the main page click an access point configuration The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point Scroll down and click the IP Settings heading The IP and VLAN settings display From the IP Setting menu select Static v IP Setting IP Setting Static IP Address Network Mask Default Gateway Primary ONS Secondary DNS Management VLAN 1 V Untagged VLAN 1 This IP setting will be tested on the AP to verify it connects to the internet Ifthis fails the AP will auto rollback to its current setting If you pre
311. splays The application automatically added this default building when you set up the location In the LOCATIONS tree click Building 1 Floor 1 displays The application automatically added this default floor when you set up the location In the LOCATIONS tree click Floor 1 The access points that you just added display To verify that a newly added access point is connected to the cloud in the LOCATIONS tree click the name of the access point The Access Point Profile section displays information about the access point v Access Point Profile Name netgear137EE8 Serial Number 29210A5WO000C0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F7 17 7E 7 Location SunnyMountainResort Building Building 1 Floor Floor 1 State Time Since Power Up 0d 0h 2m Alarms Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the application detects the access point reconfigures it and restarts it This process takes time and the State field might display Waiting for connection for several minutes After the process finishes the State field displays Connected and you can manage the access point in the cloud Get Started With Cloud Management 28 Business Central Wireless Manager Ap
312. spot is a WiFi network that provides free or paid for access through a captive portal Note The BCWM application supports the desktop versions of the following browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 or later Mozilla Firefox 15 or later Google Chrome 15 or later Apple Safari 5 or later Business Central Wireless Manager Application Business Central Wireless Manager Application Concepts The NETGEAR Business Central Wireless Manager BCWM application is a cloud management application that you can access from any computer to centrally manage cloud enabled NETGEAR access points Using the BCWM application you can add configure and monitor WiFi networks in the cloud The BCWM cloud management solution is intended primarily for small and medium sized businesses and organizations for example retail and hospitality businesses and healthcare organizations In this manual the BCWM application is referred to as the application This manual is intended primarily for cloud network administrators but also contains useful information for hotspot clerks see Chapter 9 Manage Vouchers With a Hotspot Clerk User Account System Architecture Concepts The application lets you manage multiple WiFi networks and NETGEAR WiFi access points APs over a secure connection using Secure Sockets Layer SSL You can add existing and new APs to the application which is based on AP licensing You assign both networks and access points to a locati
313. ss and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Usage icon The usage summary page for the location displays Select Client Details Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 206 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Summary Client Details CLIENT STATUS Download Full Details Hotspot Users v Last Seen Access Point Name SSID When PDT ss es ee No MAC Address 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sy a amp w N Oo n 00 00 73 8A CC FC 00 00 73 8A CD 03 00 00 73 8A CD 04 00 00 73 8ACD 02 00 00 73 8A CC F6 00 00 73 8A CD 00 00 00 73 8A CD 07 00 00 2F BF A0 D2 00 00 05 A9 05 84 00 00 5D D1 84 55 00 00 38 70 97 F7 00 00 57 0C 8D 6A 00 00 64 95 81 2E 00 00 64 95 61 28 VW714 35 86F728 VW714 35 86F728 VW714 35 86F728 VW714 35 86F728 VW7 14 35 86F728 VW714 35 86F728 VW7 14 35 86F728 VW734 35 13E808 VW734 35 13E808 VW723 35 147188 VW723 35 147188 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 VW614 35 86F788 a10locinet1 open a10locinet1 open ai10locinet1 open a10loctnett open a10locinet1 open a10loctnett open a10locinet1 open a10loctnet1 open a10loctnet2 wpa2 a10loctnet2 wpa2 a10loctnett open a10loctnet2 w
314. ss netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location The Location Profile page displays 6 On the main page click the QoS heading The QoS section expands 7 Configure the wireless QoS settings e Wi Fi Multimedia WMM By default the Enable radio button is selected and WMM is enabled To disable WMM select the Disable radio button e WMM Powersave By default the Enable radio button is selected and WMM Powersave is enabled To disable WMM Powersave select the Disable radio button 8 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 65 Manage WiFi Networks ata Location You assign WiFi networks to a location Therefore you first must set up a location and then you can add networks to that location For each network you can manage the WiFi settings such as network authentication data encryption SSID broadcast client separation VLANs and radio bands This chapter includes the following sections e Add a N
315. t Please enter a valid email address for Internet access or your customized text a field in which the user must enter an email address and the Continue button that the user must click Cloud AAA The splash page shows the default text Please enter a valid account for Internet access or your customized text a field in which the user must enter an account name another field in which the user must enter a password and the Sign In button that the user must click Note For information about the Vouchers option see Add a Basic Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 117 EULA By default the On radio button is selected and the user can click the Terms and Conditions link on the splash page to view the default EULA You can change the text of the EULA You can select the Off radio button in which case the EULA is not accessible to the user on the splash page 10 To preview the splash page click the PREVIEW button 11 To change your customization of the splash page and start again click the RESET button 12 To add the captive portal profile click the ADD WITH BASIC MODE button The Captive Portal Profile page displays the profile Note For information about how to assign a captive portal profile to a hotspot for a location or WiFi network see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 113 Business Central Wireless Manager Application
316. tegies and procedures see Chapter 2 Get Started With Cloud Management Configuring and Managing Functions You can configure and manage features for each location each WiFi network and each access point Shared settings are features that you can set up and then assign at any location Location Functions For each location you can configure and manage multiple features For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 3 Manage Locations Buildings and Floors except where otherwise indicated in the following list You can configure and manage the following features e Manage buildings and floors for the location e Add WiFi networks for the location For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 4 Manage WiFi Networks at a Location e Add access points for the location For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 5 Manage Access Points at a Location e Add hotspots with free access or paid access for the location For detailed configuration procedures see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations e Configure and manage global WiFi access point and security settings for the location including the following components WiFi radios Load balancing for access points by model Radio on off schedule Automatic radio frequency RF assignment channel allocation and output Tx power Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 11 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Build
317. that are not displayed onscreen Except for debug events events are automatically cleared after 30 days Debug events are automatically cleared after 7 days To view and download the event log for an access point 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Inthe MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 Click the Access Points icon All access points assigned to the location display 7 To select the access point do one of the following e If only a few access points are assigned to the location on the main page click the access point configuration e If many access points are assigned to the location and you know the building and floor to which the access point is assigned do the following a In the MONITORING tree click the building and then the floor b In the MONITORING tree click the access point View and Manage Alarms and Events 253 8 10 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application e f many access points are assigned to the application and you do not know the building and floor do the following a On the main page use the
318. that is shown in the upper graph do the following a To add or remove information about clients and traffic click the Wi Fi Clients 2 4GHz Clients 2 4GHz Traffic 5GHz Clients 5GHz Traffic or Wired Traffic button or click several buttons By default the Wi Fi Traffic button is selected and only WiFi traffic is shown for both WiFi bands b To show information about traffic and clients for a single network at the location select a WiFi network from the menu at the upper right of the graph c To view details point to the graph Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 205 9 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To view details about top talkers do the following a Click a MAC address in the CLIENTS table The CLIENT PROFILE pop up window displays The information that is shown is self explanatory b To close the pop up window click the x in the upper right 10 To view details about the top access points point to the lower graph View Client Details for a Location You can view details about all clients that are connected to networks at a location and download the clients table as an Excel or csv file To view details about clients that are or were connected to networks at a location and download the clients table 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email addre
319. the New Password and Repeat New Password fields specify the new password c Click the APPLY button A login window opens d Enter the user name and new password The user name is admin The new password is the one you just specified e Click the LOGIN button The General page displays 9 Inthe Cloud Settings section next to Cloud Enabled select the No radio button 10 Click the APPLY button Your settings are saved You can now configure the access point as a standalone access point Cloud Managed Access Points 284 Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of the application Table 6 Technical specifications tem Specification System architecture and supported WiFi management as a service Cloud hosted with an embedded agent devices on NETGEAR cloud managed access points For information about the supported access point and required firmware versions see Compatible NETGEAR Wireless Access Points on page 19 Browser support HTTP and HTTPS The desktop versions of the following browsers e Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 or later e Mozilla Firefox 15 or later e Google Chrome 15 or later e Apple Safari 5 or later OS support Any OS with one of the supported browsers Management interface support Desktop web management interface Language support English 285
320. the VLAN ID for a WiFi network 1 2 10 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration The All Locations page displays In the LOCATIONS tree on the left click the location at which the network is configured The Location Profile page displays In the LOCATIONS tree the Wireless Networks and Access Points headings display under the selected location In the LOCATIONS tree click the Wireless Networks heading The networks and hotspots that you configured at the location display Click the network On the main page the Network Name and Authentication section displays Click the VLAN setting heading The VLAN setting section displays Enter a VLAN ID in the VLAN field By default the VLAN ID is 1 Click the APPLY button The changes are saved The new settings are pushed immediately to the cloud managed access points for the location If a cloud managed access point for the location is not connected the new settings are pushed when the access point reconnects to the application Manage WiFi Networks at a Location 74 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Change the WiFi Network Radio Band You can change the radio band or bands that you assigned to the WiFi network when you set it up To
321. the source file Otherwise the template will not function Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 124 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application The name of the zip file for voucher use depends on whether or not you offer optional free access with a voucher e No free access with voucher cp_template_voucher_no_free_access zip e Optional free access with voucher cp_template_voucher_free_access zip After you set up a custom template you can upload it to the application making sure that you do not change the zip file name for the type of access that you are using for the captive portal To upload a custom template or CSS file to the application click the UPLOAD FILE button and follow the directions of your browser If you upload a CSS file the name of the file is stated in the CSS section To view a custom login message custom error message custom success message or custom EULA click the associated PREVIEW button in the HTML section To add the captive portal profile click the ADD WITH ADVANCED MODE button The Captive Portal Profile page displays the profile Note For information about how to assign a captive portal profile to a hotspot for a location or WiFi network see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations Change a Captive Portal Profile You can change a captive portal profile including the profile name authentication method voucher plan name us
322. thentication If you need advanced authentication select one of the available options from the Network Authentication menu and complete the procedure Then configure the advanced authentication see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 From the Data Encryption menu select the type of encryption e In the Network Key field enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters 9 Click the NEXT button Get Started With Cloud Management 25 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Get Started o o_ 9 Add Service Add Wireless Add Access Location Network Point Assign Access Point To Location Please populate the table to the right by assigning APs You can enter AP name serial number and then click Assign If you have already added APs to Inventory you can choose from APs in Inventory to assign SECURITY WARNING Access points without an assigned location have a default password Connected access points should be assigned to a location as soon as possible Assigned Access Points Skip assignment Access Points in Inventory Assigned Access Points AP Name Serial Number AP Name SerialNumber or New Access Point Name co w E 10 Decide whether you want to add and assign one or more access points at this time Do not add an access point If you do not want to add an access point at this time do the following a Click the Skip Assignment b
323. tion TKIP AES Network Key Show Characters Get Started With Cloud Management 30 10 11 12 13 14 15 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Configure the network settings a In the Network Name field enter a WiFi network name SSID b From the Wireless Network on menu select the WiFi band or bands For dual band access points you can select both bands to be active c From the Network Authentication menu select the type of authentication If you need advanced authentication select one of the available options from the Network Authentication menu and complete the procedure Then configure the advanced authentication see Change the WiFi Network Name Authentication or Encryption on page 68 d From the Data Encryption menu select the type of encryption e In the Network Key field enter a network key You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric and special characters Click the ADD THIS WIRELESS NETWORK button The application confirms the addition Click the Add Access Point link Add Access Point NOTE Please power cycle s Point in order to avoid waiting for it to establish ion with this cloud management platform The AP Local Pas d fo set to the AP Local Password for the Locatior h ed If it is not assigned to a Location the AP Li pas t to the Accounts Default AP Local Password f value for this Account s AP Local Password can be changed und ccount Settings In the Name field ent
324. tional first add the usage plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Note By default the hotspot user database includes User 1 the default hotspot user account which is assigned to Group 1 the default user group Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 131 Business Central Wireless Manager Application gt To view the hotspot user database and add a new hotspot user account 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays 5 In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left scroll down and select Hotspot Users User Group Created E UserName Full Name Policy Pian User 1 First User No Policy Group 1 11 06 14 psmith Peggy Smith DailyLiberal Guests 11 06714 cciocking Gary Clocking DailyStrictLimt Guests 11 06 14 hzompfer Hans Zompfer Premier Guests 11 06714 abelabwat Abir Belabwat Premier Guests 11 06 14 mhaze Mary Haze Premier VPs 11 06 14 teuratel Tom Curateli Premier VPs 11 06 14 fschnitke Fip Schnittke No Policy VPs 11 06 14 aadamo Ansel Adamo No Policy No Group 11 06 14 ffriuli Fanny Friuk No Policy No Group 11 06 14 crubanowitz Chet Rubsnowiz No Policy No Group 11 06 14 DELETE SELECTED EDIT SELECTED The previous figure
325. tions e Click Through No authentication is required to click through e Click Through With Email Email address is required to click through Note If you offer free WiFi access with a voucher you must select a usage plan Without a usage plan you cannot offer free WiFi access with a voucher Usage Plan 8 Click the NEXT button If you select Click Through or Click Through With Email from the Optional Free Access menu the Usage Plan menu displays From the Usage Plan menu select a usage plan for free WiFi access For information about setting up a usage plan which is also referred to as a policy plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 The basic customization page displays 9 Click the Advanced button Add Captive Portal Profile Basic Advanced Add Captive Portal Profile Use these templates to customize your own pages DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES UPLOAD FILE Image default png HTML login html error html success html eula html css ADD WITH ADVANCED MODE 10 To download NETGEAR templates that is default templates that are used for basic captive portal profiles click the DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES button and follow the directions of your browser to save the zip file to a location on your computer You can alter these default templates or use the default templates as examples to create your own templates You must keep indicators that relate to elements such as style input and email in
326. toring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Inthe MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 In the MONITORING tree click the Health icon The health summary page for the location displays 7 Select AP Details Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Command Log Event Log MANAGED ACCESS POINTS Download Full Details Number of Neighbors 1 VWW743 35 F80D00 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 2921015 VW614 35 86F788 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 233 29221A5t VW612 35 334408 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 191 29210A5 VW611 35 0AFC48 Healthy Healthy WNDAP350 262 29210A5 VW632 35 0CDF00 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 2921055 VW742 35 431208 Healthy Healthy WNDAP350 221 2922175 VW741 35 0B07E8 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 29210A51 VW734 35 13E808 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 29210A51 VW731 35 86FBA8 Healthy Healthy WNDAP350 29221A5 VW613 35 0AFAAS Healthy Critical WNDAP350 29210A5 VW623 35 13E888 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 29210A5F VW624 35 0AFE68 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 29210A5 VW622 35 F7D880 Healthy Critical WNDAP350 2921015 VW631 35 13E8A8 Healthy Healthy WNDAP350 29210A5 samena ae nercen Leaiti Galisa AMINAMIEA nnnna nc No Name Status Alarm State Model Serial N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 h h d w o I Oo n The previous figure shows the monitoring period for the MANAGED ACCESS POINTS table as Last 7 Days The columns in the tabl
327. tweight alternative to RADIUS authentication and authorization Plan the Usage Policies Determine if the location requires usage plans which are also referred to as policy plans A usage plan lets you combine an access time limit hours during which access is permitted and the maximum number of concurrently allowed connections in one plan You can include all or a selection of these restrictions in a single usage plan and assign the plan to a captive portal hotspot voucher user group and hotspot user account Plan the User Groups for Cloud AAA Hotspots Determine if the location requires specific user groups for hotspot users who access hotspots through cloud AAA authentication If it does you must set up one or more user groups and add hotspot user accounts to these user groups To restrict access you can assign these user groups to buildings at the location each user group can be assigned to one building You can associate usage plans with a user group with individual hotspot user accounts or with both 1 You cannot directly set up a hotspot with cloud AAA authentication but you can do so indirectly by assigning a captive portal that uses cloud AAA authentication to a WiFi network Introduction to the Business Central Wireless Manager 17 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Other Planning Considerations The application functions with the following concepts e A WiFi network broadcasts in an entire location
328. uildings and Floors 44 Business Central Wireless Manager Application From the Choose Action menu select Delete This Location A confirmation pop up window displays Click the YES button The location is removed from your account Manage Buildings and Floors for a Location By default each location that you add includes a default building Building 1 and default floor Floor 1 However under one location you can set up multiple buildings each with multiple floors The following sections describe how you can manage buildings and floors for a location Add a Building and Floor to a Location Add a Floor to a Building Add an Access Point to a Floor Manage the Settings for an Access Point on a Floor Change the Name and Dimensions of a Floor Remove a Floor from a Building Change the Name for a Building Remove a Building from a Location Add a Building and Floor to a Location In addition to the default building and floor you can add multiple buildings each with multiple floors to a location For information about changing and customizing the default building and floor see the following sections Change the Name for a Building on page 52 Change the Name and Dimensions of a Floor on page 51 gt To add a building and floor to a location q 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for
329. umber you cannot add the access point to the network Click the ADD THIS ACCESS POINT button The application confirms the addition Click the Assign Access Point link Manage Access Points at a Location 80 10 11 12 13 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Assign Access Point Location SunnyMountainResort KJ Building Lobby and Restaura Floor Floor 1 From the Location menu select a location From the Building menu select a building for the location If you did not add a building to the location the menu lists Building1 as the default setting From the Floor menu select a floor for the building If you did not add a floor to the building the menu lists Floor 1 as the default setting Click the ASSIGN ACCESS POINT button The changes are saved On the main page the Access Point Profile section displays information about the new access point v Access Point Profile Name netgearl37EE8 Serial Number 29210A5W000CO0 Model WNDAP350 Hardware Revision 1 0 Firmware Version 2 19 20 0 MAC Address E0 97 F7 17 7E E7 Location SunnyMountainResort Building Lobby and Restaura Floor Floor 1 Time Since Power Up 0d 0h 2m Alarms 1 Date Added 04 20 08PM 04 10 2015 PDT Date Provisioned 07 14 50PM 04 11 2015 PDT Date Located 12 51 26PM 04 16 2015 PDT Months in Service lt 1 If the access point is connected to the Internet after you add the access point to the application the app
330. umn right click anywhere in the table header A pop up window displays b Select the check boxes for the columns that you want to be shown The table adjusts To view more table columns move the slider at the bottom to the right To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom To sort the table click a table header To change the refresh rate click the 30 Sec link By default the refresh rate is one minute Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 229 Business Central Wireless Manager Application View Details and Statistics for an Access Point You view details about an access points and LAN and WiFi statistics for the access point To view details and statistics for an access point 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays 5 Inthe MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display 6 Click the Access Points icon All access points assigned to the location display 7 To select the access point do one of the following e If only a few access points are assigned to the location on the main page click the access point configuration e If
331. unt and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Configuration All Locations Choose Action Add Location Home M ist Add Captive Portal Profile SunnyMountainResort Tahoe City United States Add Usage Plan gt SunnyMountainResort Add Radius Server Profile Add User Group Add MAC ACL From the Choose Action menu select Add Location Add Location Location Name Country United States Zip Code Street Address city State Time Zone AP Local Password Specify a location name complete the location address fields select a time zone and set the location specific password for the access points that you can assign to the location Manage Locations Buildings and Floors 41 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Note Entering correct address information allows the location to be displayed on Google Maps Note The password that you must set in this step is the password that you need when you want to access the web management interface of an individual cloud managed access point or to access a cloud managed access point over an SSH connection Click the ADD THIS LOCATION button The application confirms the addition Click the CLOSE button The new location displays in the LOCATIONS tree on the left Copy the Configuration of One Location and Overwrite the Configuration of Another Location For ease of configuration you can copy an existing location in the
332. untry from the Country menu 6 Click the Change Password heading User Profile Change Password Current Password New Password Confirm New Password User Preferences 7 To change your password do the following a Enter your current password b Enter a new password c Confirm the new password d Click the User Preference heading Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 268 Business Central Wireless Manager Application User Preferences Time Zone USA Pacific Email Notifications Don t send alarm notifications Dont send new firmware notifications Dont send any notifications including licensing 8 To change the time zone for your user account select another time zone from the Time Zone menu 9 To prevent the application from automatically emailing notifications under Email Notifications select one or more check boxes 10 Click the SAVE button The changes are saved If you changed your name it does not show in the My Profile the next that you log in to your use account Change the Basic Application Account Settings Only an admin user the owner is also an admin user of the application can change the basic application account settings such as the company name country in which the company is located and company address gt To change the basic account application setting 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com
333. unts 260 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 6 Select the check boxes for the backup files The previous figure shows only a single backup file The DELETE button becomes available 7 Click the DELETE button A conformation pop up window displays 8 Click the YES button The backup files are removed and no longer display in the table on the SAVED BACKUPS page Manage the Access Point Firmware Through the Application When NETGEAR makes new cloud firmware available for your cloud managed access points the application detects the new firmware and displays a message By default the application automatically pushes the new firmware to the access points seven days after the firmware is made available However you can schedule the firmware upgrade at a particular time and day in a week You can also push the firmware upgrade immediately Schedule Firmware Upgrades for Cloud Managed Access Points You can schedule a firmware upgrade at a particular time and day in a week gt To schedule firmware upgrades for cloud managed access points 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Account The My Account page displays 5 Inthe ACCOUNT tree on the left select Settings gt Schedule Firmware By de
334. ur browser Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 207 Business Central Wireless Manager Application 14 To search for a particular component and narrow the information that is shown in the table do one of the following e Type information in a field in the table header e Make a selection from a menu in the table header e Use the search field above the table by doing the following a Click the magnifier icon in the upper right The search field becomes available b Type information in the search field Click the magnifier icon again If a match is found the results display in the table View Hotspot Usage at a Location You can view hotspot usage from all types of captive portals at a location over a monitoring period that you can customize To view hotspot usage at a location 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Monitoring The Account Statistics page displays In the MONITORING tree on the left click a location The Health Usage Security Wireless Networks and Access Points icons display Click the Usage icon The usage summary page for the location displays Select Hotspot Users gt Hotspot Usage Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 208
335. us figure on the access point The previous figure shows the monitoring period as Last 7 Days and the information in the upper graph for all WiFi traffic To select another monitoring period click the clock icon at the right st7 bays You can select a monitoring period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 227 9 Business Central Wireless Manager Application To customize the information that is shown in the Total Clients and Traffic PDT graph do the following a To add or remove information about clients and traffic click the Wi Fi Clients 2 4GHz Clients 2 4GHz Traffic 5GHz Clients 5GHz Traffic or Wired Traffic button or click several buttons By default the Wi Fi Traffic button is selected and only WiFi traffic is shown for both WiFi bands b To show information about traffic and clients for a single network that is configured on the access point select a WiFi network from the Network menu at the upper right of the graph 10 To view details about a graph including the graph that shows the connection time in percentages point to the graph View the Clients That Are Connected to an Access Point You can view details about all clients that are connected to an access point To view details about clients that are connected to an access point 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https w
336. us figure shows the period over which a search occurs as Last 7 Days 6 To select another search period click the clock icon at the right tst7 ays You can select a search period from one hour that is the last hour to 30 days 7 In the Hotspot usage details field enter all or part of a client MAC address email address user name or voucher ID What you can enter as search criteria depends on the type of WiFi network that you set up for the hotspot see the introduction of this section 8 Click the magnifier icon Summary AP Details Active Alarms Cleared Alarms Event Log Hotspot Users v Hotspot usage details DD al Search Result No Identifier SSID Location Authentication Typ DD1E15D6 GolfWeek SunnyMountainResort Voucher The previous figure shows part of a voucher ID in the Hotspot usage details field which yields a single hotspot user with a voucher ID that starts with the specified search criterium A search could yield several hotspot users 9 To view more table rows move the slider at the right to the bottom This slider is not shown in the previous image 10 To sort the table click a table header 11 To view more details about one individual hotspot user do the following a Click the user row All fields in the user row highlight blue and the VIEW button becomes available Monitor Your Account Locations Networks and Access Points 195 Business Central Wireless Manager Application b Cl
337. ution The Radius Server Profile page displays the new profile Change a RADIUS Server Profile You can change a RADIUS server profile The change affects all locations for which the RADIUS server profile is in effect You cannot disable a RADIUS server profile gt To change a RADIUS server profile 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 Inthe address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Configuration The All Locations page displays Manage Radio On Off Schedules and RADIUS Server Profiles 106 Business Central Wireless Manager Application In the SHARED SETTINGS menu in the lower left select Radius Server Profiles The All Radius Server Profiles page displays Click the profile The Radius Server Profile page displays Change the authentication settings as needed For more information see Add a RADIUS Server Profile with an Optional Accounting Server on page 105 To change the accounting settings do the following a At the bottom click the Accounting Server heading The accounting server fields display b Change the accounting settings as needed Click the SAVE button The changes are saved Remove a RADIUS Server Profile You can remove a RADIUS server profile that you no longer need To remove a RADIUS server profile 1 2 Open a b
338. utton b Continue with Step 77 Note You can always add access points at a later time see Chapter 5 Manage Access Points at a Location Add and assign one or more new access points To add and assign one or more new access points that are not yet in the application inventory do the following a In the Name field enter a name for the access point b Scroll down to the Serial Number field and enter the precise serial number for the access point Note Without entering the correct serial number you cannot add the access point to the network c Click the ASSIGN button The access point is moved to the Assigned Access Points table d To add another access point repeat Step a through Step c Assign one or more access points that are already in the application inventory To assign one or more access points that are already in the application inventory do the following a In the Access Points In Inventory table select the check boxes for the access points that you want to assign or select the check box in the table header to assign all access points Get Started With Cloud Management 26 Business Central Wireless Manager Application b Click the ASSIGN button The access points are moved to the Assigned Access Points table 11 Click the FINISH button SunnyMountainResort Choose Action v C o All Location Name SunnyMountainResort Location Profile 9 SunnyMountainRes Country United States gt
339. vidual user account You can assign a user group to one or more of the following components e Buildings at a location See Assign User Groups to Buildings at a Location on page 61 e Captive portal with cloud AAA authentication for a network See Change the WiFi Network into a Captive Portal by Assigning a Captive Portal Profile on page 76 The following sections describe how you can set up and manage user groups e Add a User Group e Add a New Hotspot User Account to a User Group e Add an Existing Hotspot User Accounts to a User Group e Change a Hotspot User Account in a User Group e Remove One or More Hotspot User Account from a User Group e Change the Group Name or Usage Plan for a User Group e Remove a User Group Add a User Group If you want to assign a usage plan to a user group first add the usage plan see Add a Usage Plan on page 128 Note By default the application includes Group 1 the default user group to which User 1 the default hotspot user account is assigned gt To add a user group and as an option add existing hotspot user accounts to the new user group 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 135 Business Central Wirel
340. want the application to create a new backup of the configuration before it starts the restore process clear the check box Click the RESTORE button A pop up window displays the following caution and requires you to enter your password By clicking restore all of your networks will go down and any connected clients will immediately lose connectivity Enter your password Click the RESTORE button in the pop up window Another pop up window displays whether the restore process is successful Click the OK button Unless you cleared the check box in Step 8 the new backup file displays in the table on the SAVED BACKUPS page It takes several minutes for the cloud managed access points to come back up with the restored configuration and reconnect to the application Remove a Cloud Configuration Backup File You can remove one or more backup files that you no longer need To remove one or more backup files 1 2 Open a browser on your computer In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays Select Account The My Account page displays In the ACCOUNT tree on the left click Backup Restore Created Date PDT Y Name Y Description 12 22 11AM 05 12 2015 BU_1 Includes 2 locations with full configs Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Acco
341. with email cloud AAA authentication or voucher authentication trough two types of advanced captive portal profiles Free access An advanced hotspot that provides free access by requiring users to click through or click through using an email address Paid access An advanced hotspot that provides paid access through cloud AAA authentication or voucher authentication A captive portal profile is a shared setting that you can assign to a free or paid for hotspot for a location or network see Chapter 8 Manage Hotspots for Locations You can also change a corporate network into a captive portal see Change the WiFi Network into a Captive Portal by Assigning a Captive Portal Profile on page 76 or set up a new captive portal for a corporate network The following table describes the options that are available to you when you set up a Captive portal profile Table 3 Captive portal options Feature Captive Portal Free Access Captive Portal Paid Access Authentication Click through e Cloud AAA authentication Click through with email e Voucher Redirect users Redirecting to a website is an option Redirecting to a website is an option Manage Captive Portal Profiles Usage Plans and User Access 109 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Table 3 Captive portal options continued Feature Captive Portal Free Access Captive Portal Paid Access Voucher definition Not applicable S
342. with a Paid For Subscription Note Only admin users that is users with a security profile that is set to Admin can perform license management tasks 272 Business Central Wireless Manager Application About the Trial Period The trial period starts when you set up and activate your BCWM subscription NETGEAR does not impose any special limits to the number of locations networks and access points that you can add during the trial subscription View the Trial Expiration Date During the Trial Period During the trial period you can clearly see the remaining period for free evaluation gt To display the remaining time of your trial period 1 Open a browser on your computer 2 In the address bar enter https wireless netgear com The application login page displays 3 Enter the email address and password for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Account The My Account page displays 5 Inthe ACCOUNT tree on the left select Licenses 6 DAYS 14 MANAGED Left in trial Access Points ADD LICENSE The page displays the number of days that are left in the trial period and the number of managed APs What Happens at the End of the Free Trial Period One month before the end of the trial period the application displays alerts about the scheduled end of the trial period and you receive weekly emails notifying you of the pending end of the trial period Before the end of
343. wn pages DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES UPLOAD FILE Image default png HTML login html errocht success html eula html PREVIEW css cucu TI To download NETGEAR templates that is default templates that are used for basic captive portal profiles click the DOWNLOAD TEMPLATES button and follow the directions of your browser to save the zip file to a location on your computer You can alter these default templates or use the default templates as examples to create your own templates You must keep indicators that relate to elements such as style input and email in the source file Otherwise the template will not function The name of the zip file depends on the type of authentication that you are using for the captive portal e Click Through cp_template_click_through zip e Click Through With Email cp_template_click_through_email zip e Cloud AAA cp_template_aaa zip After you set up a custom template you can upload it to the application making sure that you do not change the zip file name for the type of authentication that you are using for the captive portal Note For information about the Vouchers option see Add an Advanced Captive Portal Profile for Access Through Vouchers on page 122 To upload a custom template or CSS file to the application click the UPLOAD FILE button and follow the directions of your browser If you upload a CSS file the name of the file is stated in the CSS section To view a cust
344. word for your BCWM account and click the LOG IN button The Home page displays 4 Select Account The My Account page displays 5 From the Choose Action menu select Invite User The Invite User page displays 6 In the Email Address field enter the email address of the invitee 7 From the Role menu select a role Admin A user who can configure the application e Read only A user who cannot configure the application but who can view the web configuration interface Hotspot clerk A user who cannot configure the application and who cannot view the web configuration interface but who can sell and print vouchers and view the status of sold vouchers 8 Click the INVITE THIS USER button The application sends an email message to the invitee Manage Maintenance Firmware Application Users and Accounts 265 Business Central Wireless Manager Application Accept an Invitation and Set Up a User Account The owner of the application and an admin user of the application can send invitations to invite others to set up an application user account If you receive such an invitation before you can access the application you must accept the invitation sign up for an user account and activate the user account Your user capabilities depend on the role that is assigned to you To accept an invitation sign up for a user account and activate the user account 1 Open the Invitation Letter email and click the here link Note

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GUIDE DE L`USAGER - Manuel d`utilisation - des  Adhesivo de Lunas  Wortschatz_und_Verständigungsprobleme_1983.  VisIVOServer 2.1 User Guide Introduction  Swann 4-Alert SW244-DAO User's Manual  Bedienungsanleitung  Chatillon DFM Digital Force Gage  2008/04/08 54-AA-MAD65A CoolFreeze Operating  North Star M1573001A User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file